JP2020049334A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can enhance an attention degree to a ball.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured such that a mode in which a ball reaches a sort device 4850 can be changed by an operation mode of an open/close plate 1300, while a state in which a ball can pass through a first specific winning port 1000a is kept. It can be therefore restricted intentionally which mode a ball is made to reach the sort device 4850 in.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 51

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. There is a gaming machine that does (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-155538 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball that has entered the special winning opening.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can improve the power of attention to a ball that has entered a special winning opening. .

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. Switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entrance and a second state in which a ball flowing from the upstream side of the entrance cannot be guided to the entrance, and the entrance Detecting means for detecting a ball entering the game, profit providing means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the ball passing through the entrance, and a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means And a profit switching means for switching the ball in the second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means, wherein the ball reaches the profit switching means by an operation mode of the incoming ball switching means. Is configured to be variable.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the number of balls related to the time when the incoming ball switching unit is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching unit. You.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, while the incoming ball switching unit is switched from the first state to the second state, the ball is thrown to the profit switching unit. A starting state to be started is formed.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the attention to the ball that has entered the special winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to change the number of balls guided to the profit switching means depending on the time when the ball entry switching means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine according to the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, it is possible to further improve the attention to the ball.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning device in the XII-XII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device in XII-XII line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 19 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 18. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of a variable prize-winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning device in XXId-XXId line of Drawing 21 (c). FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter and a big hit type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the second operation pattern. FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27 (c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening and a 2nd specific winning opening in a 4th operation pattern, and (b) is a 1st specific winning opening and a 2nd specific winning opening in a 5th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning openings. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A) to (c) are sectional views of the first variable prize-winning device taken along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the flow-down aspect of the ball which reached the 1st variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of a game board in a 4th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening and a specific area | region in a 6th operation | movement pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the time measurement of a 1st specific winning opening and a specific area | region in a 7th operating pattern. It is a figure showing a change. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 8th operation pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the time measurement of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in a 9th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific field in the 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of a game board in a 5th embodiment. It is a partial back view of a game board. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (A) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd specific winning opening in the 11th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd operation pattern in the 12th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning openings. It is a partial front view of a game board in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LII-LII in FIG. 51. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device. (A) is a figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 13th operation pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the timekeeping of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 14th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a back perspective view of a covering front board in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of a 1st variable winning device. FIG. 36 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to a line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b).

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning hole 63. The entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 1000, the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is formed by the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin-made arc member 70 connecting the rails on the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed in response to a prize winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When passing, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as a probable change state of the special symbol), For example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 is referred to as “the lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the lottery is performed for the entrance to the second entrance 640. The special symbol lottery to be performed is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  It should be noted that as the jackpot types of the special symbols, there are provided six types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot a”, “jackpot b”, and “jackpot c” (FIG. 22). reference). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000 is changed.

  When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) elapses, the lottery result is displayed. Is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of retained balls for the second entrance 640 (special) If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is started. When both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol), it is determined whether or not the winning is the normal symbol. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be in an easy state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  In the present embodiment, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given from the end of the special game state to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries, and the special symbol lottery is performed. After the completion of 100 times, the normal state is set.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol change state is given after the special game state ends, the special symbol change state is configured to end according to the number of special symbol lotteries. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), the pachinko machine 10 May shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed). In this case, after a jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c, which will be described later), a normal symbol time reduction state is set until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  In addition, the number of lotteries of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

  Further, the number of lotteries of the special symbol which is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the so-called probability is being changed (probable change), in other words, to the special game state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the special symbol is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the special symbol being changed.

  The normal symbol time reduction state (medium time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. In addition, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which the special symbol is not probable and the normal symbol is not shortened (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability increases).

  During a special symbol change or a normal symbol during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the normal symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed. A longer time is set as compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is being shortened. That is, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

  It is to be noted that, while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time. Alternatively, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when a normal symbol is hit may be configured to be greater than in the normal state. In addition, during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the ordinary symbol ( Only the winning probability of the second symbol) may be increased as compared to the normal state.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, at the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate in a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, is being executed. In this case, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation is completed, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry of the ball is performed. The number of balls is retained up to a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, Special symbols (first symbols) according to the jackpot a, the jackpot b, and the jackpot c) are shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 to change the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and a variable symbol display of a second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball at a normal entrance (through gate) 67. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the fluctuating display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", or "big hit c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A fluctuation display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", any of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including the odd number is also included. The variable display in which the main symbols to which are added is aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of a display (right-hand navigation) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and prompts the user to launch a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is in a certain state or the normal symbol is reduced in time, so that the ball is shifted to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting the ball (right-handed), the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. As will be described in detail later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) is performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first entrance 64 As compared with the case where a special symbol is drawn based on the ball having entered the ball (a special symbol 1 lottery), a jackpot (a jackpot a) in which the maximum profit can be obtained is more likely. Therefore, in the certain state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit, or in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the right-handed execution is advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the positive change state or the normal symbol time saving state, the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol's probable change state or the normal symbol's time reduction state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol is in a probable change state or in a normal symbol time reduction state, a specific image (right-handed navigator) is displayed so that the player can change the special symbol in a probable state or a normal symbol time reduction state. It is configured to ensure that the benefits of

  In the right-hand navigation, the character "Aim for the right!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely obtain the benefits of being in the specially changed state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined that the player is performing right-handing even though it is not during the period in which the player should launch (right-hand) the ball on the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the image is displayed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not in a stable state or a normal symbol is not saved in time).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily opened in the normal state (even if the player hits right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, when the player hits the ball in the normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the player hits the ball at the first entrance 64 by hitting the ball left. That is, if the player makes a right-handed hit in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to hit the jackpot, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) loss of the player.

  When it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state, the characters "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that right-handing should not be performed (left-handing should be performed). Also, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal state by checking the presence or absence of the right-hand warning screen.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not the ball is right-handed, for example, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) into which the ball can flow when right-handed. Judgment is made based on whether or not the ball is hit.

  In the present embodiment, a right strike warning image is displayed when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (entered) the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being played, and the right A hit warning image may be displayed. Thus, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether there is any fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when detecting that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a, a signal indicating that the illegality is being performed to the hall computer is provided. You may comprise so that it may output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that the illegal operation is performed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the illegal operation is performed.

  Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable prize device 1000 is, for example, a case where a ball is detected in the first specific prize port 1000a even though it is not in the special game state (big hit state).

  When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable prize device 1000, a large character "Warning" is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a character "Please call a gate error attendant" is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and can promptly request a clerk in the hall for repair or the like.

  Each time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction in the game state than in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol change, and during the normal symbol time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, the chance of hitting the normal symbol increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during a certain change of the special symbol and during a time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during the certain change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than that during the normal state during the special change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per one normal symbol contact may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball flowing down the right side of the game board. Are configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. Also, the number of assembled normal entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the mounting position of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on when the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view, a second entrance 640 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on by the second entrance switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are different from each other, for example, the first entry. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins the ball opening 64 may be set to three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second inlet port 640 may be set to five.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, The object 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher during a special symbol change and during a normal symbol time reduction, and the time required for the normal symbol change display is shorter than in the normal state. In the display, the symbol “○” is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than in the normal state. Therefore, a state in which a ball can be more easily won in the second entrance 640 than in the normal state can be created during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as provided in the second entrance 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Here, the probability of a big hit in the case where a ball has won in the first entrance 64 and the case where a ball has won in the second entrance 640 is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. However, the probability of the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) that provides the maximum profit (departure) as the jackpot type selected in the case of the jackpot is determined when the ball is won in the second entrance 640. Is set higher than when the ball has won the first entrance opening 64.

  In normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim for

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the ball is passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be opened. Since the ball is easy to win in the second entrance 640, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right strike”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim at the big hit by the prize at the second entrance 640 while opening the electric accessory 640a by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Becomes

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second ball entrance 640), and the first specific opening that is opened in the left-right direction substantially at the center thereof. A winning port (large opening port) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery performed due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning port 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated, for example, at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player. (15 balls based on winning of one ball).

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300 that forms an open state for guiding a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening / closing plate 1300. Have. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or is hardly won. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the open / close plate 1300 upward, thereby temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, and switching between the open state and the normal closed state. Is operated alternately.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first entrance port 64. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the entrances 63, 64, 1000a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first exit 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. I do.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of an opening and closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) composed of a solenoid with a large open port for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, and the like) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. I do.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 1000 has an inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof, and enters the second entrance 640 of the balls flowing down the right side of the variable timepiece unit 80 when the player makes a right hit. Almost all of the spheres that have flowed downstream from the sphere are guided to the flow path forming part.

  FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a covered front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covered front plate. An opening / closing plate 1300 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the power transmitting member 1200 and a power transmission member 1400 rotatably supported on the rear side of the main body member 1100 and applying a load to the opening / closing plate 1300 by rotation; A driving device 1500 that drives the driving device 1400, a regulating member 1600 that regulates the discharge of the sphere in conjunction with the opening and closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, and a regulating member 1600 that cover the main body member 1100 from the rear side. And a rear cover 1700 that is fastened and fixed as described above.

  The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 which is recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front to the back side. A housing part 1120 that is housed and formed partially through, a holding hole 1130 that is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side of the housing part 1120 when viewed from the front, and a ball flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 A projecting portion 1140 projecting along the path, an outlet 1150 for ejecting a sphere from the front to the rear of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation projecting to the rear side of the thin plate member 1110 and supporting the power transmission member 1400; Mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 protruding in a claw shape so as to be able to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 above the discharge port 1150. Provided.

  The housing portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed, a rectangular recess 1122 provided in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and A through-hole formed in a rectangular shape having a posture perpendicular to a straight line connecting a pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 operating along the right end of the recess 1122 forward and backward of the thin plate member 1110. 1123 mainly.

  The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly larger in width than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the covering front plate 1200. You. That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the covering front plate 1200.

  The rectangular concave portion 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the depth of the concave portion is slightly deeper than the plate portion 1310. Accordingly, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is inclined (closed state), the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular concave portion 1122, and the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding from the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

  The protruding portion 1140 is protruded to a position where the protruding portion 1140 comes into contact with a sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200. The falling ball is decelerated by contacting the protruding portion 1140. Note that a similar protruding portion 1235 is also provided in the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap the protruding portion 1140 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

  The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a uniform protrusion height on the rear side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib.

  The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotation tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip portion 1421.

  The covering front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 to the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 in front view to the rear side. 1220, a housing portion 1230 extending in a box shape opened to the back side toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220 in the left-right direction, and provided at the upper end of the housing portion 1230. And a detection sensor 1240.

  The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220 when viewed from the front, the left side wall portion of the housing portion 1230 when viewed from the front, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow passage as a hole through which a ball flows down in the vertical direction. Unit is configured.

  The storage portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape in a front view, and has a storage channel 1231 formed with a width that allows a sphere to flow down inside, and protrudes rearward at a middle portion of the storage channel 1231. It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side in front view.

  The storage channel 1231 is configured such that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens to the back side is extended while being bent in a front U-shape, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 so that a sphere passes therethrough. To form a flow path. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the area where the storage channel 1231 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231.

  The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12) which is an inclined surface that guides the ball toward the rear side at the lowermost end, and rolling that rolls the ball guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. Surface 1231b.

  The angle of inclination of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the angle of inclination of the near side (right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 reaching the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane.

  The projecting portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the protruding portion 1235 is protruded to a position where it can contact the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 and decelerates the sphere by contacting the sphere.

  The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left as viewed from the front. This allows the ball that has landed on the inclined surface 1237 to roll leftward and be guided to the flow path forming portion.

  The detection sensor 1240 has a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the passing of the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the winning number is counted.

  The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between a case where the ball is rolled toward the detection sensor 1240 and a case where the ball is dropped without contacting the ball, depending on a difference in posture. And a pair of shaft portions 1320 protruding from the short-side end of the plate portion 1310 along the longitudinal direction, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view. And a loaded portion 1330 to be provided.

  The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls in the rising posture (open state), and the length in the short direction is covered in the rising posture (open state) in which the short direction extends in the front-rear direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered in an arc-shaped cross section at an upper corner in an ascending posture (open state) at an end opposite to the shaft 1320.

  The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

  The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry preventing portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an interposed transmission portion 1332 extended to the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the interposed transmission portion And an engagement portion 1333 protruding from 1332 to the right in rear view (on the side where the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

  The engaging portion 1333 extends to a position where the engaging portion 1333 interferes with the operation trajectory of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on an upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, not the corners but the chamfered portion 1333a comes into contact with the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. .

  The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body 1410 and an extension 1420 extending from the main body 1410 in the axial direction.

  The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a protruding pin 1412 protruding from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the direction in which the support hole 1411 is formed.

  The protruding pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the protruding pin 1412 is displaced with the linear movement of the distal end member 1520 due to the switching of the excitation of the driving device 1500, and the power transmission is performed. The member 1400 rotates.

  The extending portion 1420 includes a rotating tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, a pushing portion 1422 protruding forward from the rotating tip portion 1421, Is provided.

  The driving device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves the movable member by switching the excitation, and a tip member 1520 in an H shape (a shape having concave portions in the upper and lower parts) when viewed from the front, which is disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , Mainly comprising.

  The tip member 1520 is configured such that the upper concave portion is capable of accommodating the protruding pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, the concave portion is formed in a shape that keeps the protruding pin 1412 housed inside while the power transmission member 1400 rotates (see FIG. 20).

  The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extending portion 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, A surface on the member 1100 side is mainly provided with an extended portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 formed at the surface position and having a greater thickness than the extended portion 1620.

  The extending portion 1620 is arranged on the movement trajectory of the interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the interposition transmission portion 1332 when the opening / closing plate is in the rising posture (open state).

  The ball receiving portion 1630 overlaps with the discharge port 1150 in a tilted position (a position in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is located at a lower position, a storage state) (the ball is discharged through the opening of the discharge port 1150). In such a manner as to be narrowed so as not to be performed.

  Note that the regulating member 1600 is urged by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain a rising posture (a posture in which the end on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, a discharging state).

  The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710, which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. The ball discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the opening and closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1110 are covered. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be arranged along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without reducing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are juxtaposed at an interval through which a sphere can pass, the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 in the state shown in FIGS. By guiding the ball in between, the ball can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and to receive an irregular prize (for example, a ball hitting a nail or the like is skipped in the lateral direction without being guided to the opening and closing plate 1300). 1240).

  Although details will be described later, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, so that the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  The open state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. 10 and 11, the opening and closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated by imaginary lines in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. This prevents the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 from falling.

  The sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 rolls on the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 along the slope, and a detection sensor 1240 from the right end thereof. And enters the storage channel 1231.

  In the open state of the opening and closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the front plate 1200. Therefore, compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that the plate portion 1310 is in contact with the covering front plate 1200, the required material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening / closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

  In addition, by reducing the movement trajectory of the distal end of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the short direction, it is easy to avoid interference between a ball passing in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

  Here, although the details will be described later, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state, so that the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the sphere passing through the detection sensor 1240 is stored in the storage channel. Is stored in Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state where the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the storage channels 1231 of the present embodiment are formed with a length capable of storing spheres up to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). When ten balls are stored in the storage device 1231, the tenth ball stops at the position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  Therefore, the tenth ball becomes a stopper, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, when the eleventh ball attempts to pass through the detection sensor 1240, the resistance becomes extremely large, and the eleventh ball can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, so that the balls remaining on the opening / closing plate 1300 flow down below the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged by switching the regulating member 1600 to the discharging state in accordance with the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere stops at a position where it is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. I do.

  When the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state. During the switching, the tenth ball receives the load from the ball entry prevention unit 1331 and the tenth ball is stored. It is pushed into the inside of the road 1231 (see FIG. 21B). In other words, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a state of closing the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening / closing plate 1300 is being switched to the closed state, the tenth ball entry preventing portion 1331 does not move. Block the opening of the detection sensor 1240 while abutting (rubbing) with the other ball, due to the difference between the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates. The moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened can be prevented, and the eleventh ball can be prevented from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, there is no need to limit the period from when the specified number of balls is detected by the detection sensor 1240 to when the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening / closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening / closing operation may be started one second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after the tenth ball comes into contact with the ninth ball (after the center of the ball is located on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the ball entry prevention portion 1331). In order to operate the opening / closing plate 1300, control is performed so that the opening / closing plate 1300 opens and closes 0.5 seconds after the detection by the detection sensor 1240.

  According to the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening and closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In the present embodiment, the prevention (delay) of entry of the ball can be performed only for the eleventh ball. That is, the first to tenth spheres can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special game state as compared to the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole sphere.

  For example, in a structure in which a ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 is once decelerated at the passing position to delay winning of a subsequent ball, it is easy to suppress winning of the eleventh ball, while it is easy to suppress winning of the eleventh ball. When the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 because the tenth ball also decelerates when each of the tenth balls rolls on the rolling surface 1311 in a partially continuous manner. There is a problem that the game becomes longer and the game is prolonged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the first to tenth balls are decelerated is not employed, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. Even if the balls flow down in succession, the balls can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at the flow speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

  In addition, even if most of the period during which the open / close plate 1300 is in an open state due to repair of a clogged ball has elapsed and the game has begun at the end of the period, the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 is not affected. Since there is no significant deceleration, more balls can be entered.

  Regarding the eleventh ball, no matter how fast the ball falls toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts tilting), regardless of the speed, The ball up to the tenth ball can be physically prevented from passing the eleventh ball through the detection sensor 1240.

  With reference to FIG. 12, the arrangement of the spheres staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 12, spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated.

  Here, a mechanism will be described in which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 have the same arrangement every time. First, the ball P1 that first enters the empty storage channel 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231a inclined backward at the lowermost portion of the storage channel 1231 and is arranged at a position where it contacts the front surface of the regulating member 1600. You.

  The ball P1 is weighted by the ball P2 that subsequently enters the ball reaching the lower end, and settles in the arrangement shown in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom of arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). That is, the pachinko machine 10 may lean toward the covering front plate 1200 side or may lean toward the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100 depending on the degree of fall in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 12, the protruding portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 1140 comes into contact with the ball P2. There is no contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

  The ball P2 is weighted by reaching a position where the subsequently entered ball P3 comes into contact with the ball P2. Here, in the present embodiment, even when the ball P2 is located at any position in the front-rear direction, the projecting portion 1235 arranged on the covering front plate 1200 is located on the right side of the ball P2 and the projecting portion 1235. The ball P3 is located between the positions where the ball P3 cannot enter and come into contact with the thin plate member 1210 of the overlaid front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the ball P2 is kept small).

  Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is located on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is positioned on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side in FIG. 12). ). Therefore, the ball P2 is moved toward the front side (the lower side in FIG. 12) by the load of the ball P3. Thereby, the ball P2 is settled in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the ball P3 receives a load from the subsequently entering ball P4 under substantially the same conditions (except that the front-rear direction is reversed) as the condition that the ball P2 receives the load from the ball P3. Settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  That is, the arrangement of the n-th ball in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n + 1) -th ball. Further, in the present embodiment, the fixing of the arrangement of the spheres is not performed by narrowing the storage channel 1231, but while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere, the projecting portions 1140, 1235 is provided. Thereby, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the ball is stored in a fixed arrangement every time an action of storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, the number of stored items can be unified each time.

  With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIGS. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 13A, the ball P1 is ejected and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13B, the ball P2 is ejected and the ball P3 is located at the position of the ball P2 in FIG. Is shown in the figure.

  As will be described later, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the open / close plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231. When the ball is ejected. The ball disposed at the lowermost end (the ball P1 in FIG. 12) is discharged to the rear side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following ball (the ball P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space formed thereby. The balls are ejected in sequence.

  Here, the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the extended portion (the flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage channel 1231 with respect to the horizontal plane. Since the flow speed is higher than that of the ball P2, a gap is generated between the ball P1 and the ball P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, the load applied from the ball P2 to the ball P1 at the time of discharging the ball P1 can be minimized, so that the speed at the time of discharging the ball P1 is uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P1. Can be

  After the sphere P1 is discharged, the following spheres P2, P3, and P4 flow downstream (left side in FIG. 12) along the inclination of the extending portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the ball P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the balls P3 and P4 come into contact with the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are changed to the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-back direction components, and pass through the positions of the leading spheres P2 and P3, respectively, and decelerate.

  In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231 by abutting the protruding portions 1140 and 1235, and the ball stored earlier stops. It is rearranged to the position where it was, and decelerates.

  As a result, a gap is created between the ball P2 and the ball P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load applied to the ball P2 from the ball P3 when the ball P2 is discharged can be minimized. The speed at which the ball P2 is discharged can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P2.

  In other words, since the subsequent ball flows down the storage channel 1231 for a longer distance, the manner of acceleration of the subsequent ball due to gravity changes as the number of stored balls increases, and the discharge mode of the ball P2 (the speed at the time of discharge, There is a possibility that the discharge interval between the ball and the ball P1 may change. However, the change in the discharge mode is determined by the action of the above-described protrusions 1140 and 1235 (the ball that is discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball). (A function of eliminating a load due to gravity) by providing a gap between the ball and the sphere.

  Thereafter, the subsequent spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B to discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231. As described above, by forming a gap between the ball discharged by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the discharged ball is discharged without receiving the weight of the subsequent ball. Therefore, the discharge mode of the spheres (speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) can be made uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the projections 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the ball (speed at the time of discharge, discharge interval, and the like) uniform. Note that, in the present embodiment, the discharging mode of the ball requires about 0.2 seconds to discharge one ball. Therefore, by keeping the regulating member 1600 in the discharge state for 2 seconds or more, all of the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged.

  14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 1000. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is located above the engagement portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300. It is arranged at a distance.

  Since the interposed transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the upper side and is separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not receive a load from the interposed transmission portion 1332, and the regulating member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). The discharge state is maintained by the urging force.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 projects in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or smaller than the projected area of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

  FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device along line XIX-XIX in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 1000. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced in a counterclockwise direction. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

  The interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side with the rotation of the power transmission member 1400. In this state, the extension 1620 of the restriction member 1600 receives a load from the interposition transmission portion 1332, and the posture of the restriction member 1600. Is switched to the tilting posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a load associated with the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and the urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the regulating member 1600. In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring is applied. , While maintaining the open / close plate 1300 in the open state while suppressing the driving force of the solenoid 1510. The large biasing force of the torsion spring enables the regulating member 1600 to be immediately switched to the discharging state, thereby leading to the effect that the ball can be quickly discharged from the storage channel 1231. Hereinafter, the adopted structure will be described.

  In this embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation trajectory E1 of the power transmission member 1400, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state. , The power transmission member 1400 is pushed out of the motion trajectory E1 along the rotation axis direction of the power transmission member 1400. The movement trajectory E1 is illustrated as the outer shape of the movement trajectory of a portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

  Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400 but the surface forming the rotation direction. And in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

  That is, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 1600 is directed to the direction in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is pushed back toward the closed state. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

  Thus, once the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the open / close plate 1300 in the open state can be prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the open / close plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the open / close plate 1300 at the maximum value.

  That is, after the solenoid 1510 was excited so as to generate a driving force sufficient to switch the regulating member 1600 to the stored state against the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of the operation, the applied voltage was reduced. However, the open / close plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

  Therefore, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be kept open and the regulating member 1600 can be kept in the storage state without being affected by the load.

  In addition, as the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, a load given by the weight of a sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, the opening / closing plate 1300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311. Therefore, when the ball lands, it receives a load due to the weight of the ball, and the number of balls frequently changes. 1300 is given a varying load. In addition, for example, since a load is applied to the regulating member 1600 from a sphere stored in the storage channel 1231, particularly a sphere arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231, the load is applied to the regulating member 1600. Thus, a fluctuating load is given.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening and closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked, the regulating member 1600 cannot be set to the discharging state while the opening and closing plate 1300 is kept open. Therefore, even if the open / close plate 1300 is illegally maintained in an open state, it is physically determined that more balls (10 or more balls in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the opening and closing plate 1300 from being fraudulently maintained in the open state and increase the number of prize balls to be obtained.

  20 and 21 illustrate the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 21 (a). 21C is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XXIb-XXIb, FIG. 21C is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21D is XXId of FIG. 21C. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device 1000 in the -XXId line.

  20 and 21, in order to facilitate understanding, only the open / close plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). The other components are not shown, and the state in which the open / close plate 1300 changes from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order.

  That is, FIGS. 20A and 20B show a state in which the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (a state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited). 20 (c), the state in which the distal end member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). 21), the tip member 1520 is displaced and is located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2. In FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced. A state where the reference numeral 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (a final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) is illustrated.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the near side is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross-section as used in the illustration is indicated by an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the ball.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 20 (c), although the power transmission member 1400 rotates, the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains its posture. Note that, in FIG. 20C, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300 abut.

  This allows the power transmission member 1400 to be energized before the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated from the closed state to the open state, so that the power transmission member 1400 starts rotating and the opening / closing plate 1300 starts rotating simultaneously. Thus, the driving force required at the start of rotation (at the time of initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharging state, the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and switches between the closed state and the open state. An intermediate state is set (see FIG. 21B).

  In the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, when the plate portion 1310 protrudes to the front side, the ball flows down to the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 (the right side in FIG. 21B). The ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21B), but power is transmitted by moving the tip member 1520 rightward in rear view (rightward in FIG. 21A). Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, the rotation of the open / close plate 1310 due to the weight of the ball can be prevented.

  Therefore, in the intermediate state of the open / close plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, it is possible to discharge the sphere from the discharge port 1150 and to suppress the ball from passing downward on the front side of the open / close plate 1300. .

  Thus, the problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharging state during the time required to discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 and the problem of shortening the closing state of the opening and closing plate 1300 (reducing the interval), which is opposite thereto. In the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the discharge of the ball is continued, the plate portion 1310 is extended to the middle position, and the ball is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200. , Can be achieved together.

  At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), the opening / closing plate 1300 is positioned so as to prevent the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position separated from the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 below, so that the rolling surface 1311 in the state shown in FIG. Can be prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. This can prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, and can effectively maintain the function of limiting the winning number of balls by the first variable winning device 1000. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21D, at the same time when the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be used also as the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

  20 and 21, the case where the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state is described. However, when the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is grasped by going back to FIG. 20 and FIG. can do.

  When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21D is changed to the state shown in FIG. 21B. Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operation direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the loaded portion 1330.

  That is, since the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state after the operation of the open / close plate 1300, it is impossible to maintain the open / close plate 1300 in the open state after the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state. Can be. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular winning in which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts being discharged.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball abuts against the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. In the present embodiment, this can be made impossible.

  That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the open / close plate 1300 is being changed from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward. When the sphere comes into contact with the sphere, no load is generated to support the opening / closing plate 1300 acting in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 descends with the weight of the ball, so that the ball cannot be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the irregular winning from occurring.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 22B is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22 (b)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored. , And the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot A, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot B is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 49” (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot B is reached, the jackpot game of eight rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 1200 prize balls.

  The jackpot C is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot C is reached, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 600 prize balls.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), in any case, the first variable prize winning device 1000 sets the first operation pattern. Works with Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out that can be obtained by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. As the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game increases.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, while a jackpot of 4 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 50%. So basically you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the four-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the fifteen-round jackpot game, so that the launch of a ball aiming at the subsequent jackpot acquisition can be started earlier.

  On the other hand, when a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the second entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, The jackpot a is defined in association with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the big hit a, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 as in the case of the big hit A. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot b is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 89” (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot b is reached, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 (details will be described later). In this case, the prize balls paid out to the player are necessarily less than 2250 (1200 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of the jackpot a.

  The jackpot c is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot c, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 (details will be described later). In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of jackpot a, and the prize paid out in each round The time required for ball and jackpot games fluctuates.

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn in a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the type of the big hit. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, and the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, the time required for the jackpot game can be made longer when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and big hit c) than when the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when the jackpot (the jackpot b and the jackpot c) with a small number of payouts is acquired, the timing at which the ball is hit for the next jackpot is delayed as compared with the case of the jackpot a.

  Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency (Including the number of payouts).

  As a result, in the breakdown of the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entry to the second entrance 640), the jackpot (jackpot a) that can receive a large amount of payout in a time efficient manner and the time inefficient payout. It is possible to provide a small number of jackpots (jackpot b and jackpot c), and it is possible to increase the profit of the player obtained when the jackpot a is acquired. As a result, the difference in the number of payouts when playing the game continuously for a predetermined time while maintaining the probability of obtaining the jackpot a large (the difference between the maximum value of the total number of obtained balls and the minimum value of the total number of obtained balls). (Difference) can be increased.

  As described above, during the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the hit of the normal symbol is reduced. It is set to be longer (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if the big hit is made, the special design prone to the big hit a (maximum hitting big hit) is repeated. This makes it easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as the determination value that is the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, the normal symbol It is determined whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23 (b) is a time measurement of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. FIG. 23C is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the third operation pattern.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the first operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time period in which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be entirely discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored spheres. Is done. Therefore, in order to discharge 10 balls, it takes 2 seconds for the furniture.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  In the first operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which no ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the ball during the first interval time Int1 between rounds. Therefore, even in the second and subsequent rounds, the specified number (in this embodiment, ten) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of each round is achieved. Then, the round game R can be ended without waiting for 30 seconds. Therefore, the round game R can be advanced promptly.

  Thereafter, in the same manner, the round game R of the third round up to the fifteenth round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between the rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

  The second interval time between rounds Int2 is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored spheres. Is done. Therefore, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is five, for example, when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the balls are discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. However, five spheres still remain in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  In the second operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the ball during the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third to fifteenth rounds are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds between each round game R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game are compared. The ball can be fired at intervals of at least 0.6 seconds.

  First, when a jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, the time required for ten balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is at least 6 seconds. When the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time between rounds Int1, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) × 15R + ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10C × 15R).

  On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, ten balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only five balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) × 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 ( 2s) + ED (11s)). Further, the payout number is 1200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only five balls can be won in the round game R of the second and subsequent rounds.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, it takes three times or more as long as the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern. Will be dramatically worse.

  Thereby, the interest of the player in the case of performing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern can be improved. That is, the rare value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a can be increased, the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot can be improved, and the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Although the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 second, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be set to various numerical values, and can be changed in each round.

  For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to use

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time between rounds Int2 is set to 0.5 second, since only two balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If 10 are stored, the round game R is started with eight balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the payout number is also small (30).

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, since seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If the individual balls are stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) of payouts can be desired.

  In addition, the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds can be set to 2.0 seconds (or more time). In this case, at the start of the immediately following round game R, no balls remain in the storage channel 1231 and ten balls can be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to reduce the progress time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  The state in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the second round of the round game R due to the discharge of the balls during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is formed. In this embodiment, ten pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls can be paid out, and the first operating time T1 of each round can be obtained. The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, the prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as in the first operation pattern, while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

  Thereafter, similarly, the third to tenth round round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 interposed between the round round games R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the tenth round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the eleventh round game R is started.

  In the eleventh round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by a timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the eleventh round round game R, The open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eleventh round of the round game R ends.

  Thereafter, similarly, the twelfth to fifteenth round round games R are repeated with the second inter-round interval time Int2 interposed between the round games R, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  By discharging the ball during the second interval time Int2 between rounds, a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in the eleventh round and thereafter can be formed. Therefore, after the eleventh round, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

  Also, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is reduced as compared to the tenth round. Accordingly, the total number of payouts is smaller than the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 = (10C × 10R + 5C × 5R) × 15), and the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is reduced. It can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on what round game is being performed.

  In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the end of the round is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mode in which the number of payouts is small at the beginning but the number of payouts increases toward the end, or a mode in which the number of payouts has a peak in a middle round.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is changed depending on the round game R to be performed, thereby giving the jackpot game a speed and improving the interest of the player. Can be done.

  In addition, when the jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, the player does not change from the first operation pattern until the round game R of the tenth round. A jackpot game can be performed with the expectation that the number can be obtained.

  Further, the second interval time Int2 between rounds set in one second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary numerical value corresponding to each round for each big hit type. For example, in some jackpot types, the second interval time Int2 between the rounds of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds, and in another certain jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between the rounds of the third operation pattern is set. For example, the interval time Int2 can be set to 0.5 seconds in an odd round and set to 1.0 seconds in an even round.

  That is, by further subdividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games having different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the eleventh round, it is possible to make the number of balls finally paid out unpredictable until the jackpot game ends, and it is possible to improve the attention to the jackpot game.

  Further, the change in the degree of payout and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) may be made to correspond. For example, when a jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, a figure of a running character is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the stamina of the character remains in the beginning (the first round). The running character runs smoothly, and many prize balls are paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina is depleted (in the last round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and starts walking, and in conjunction with that, the payout of prize balls decreases.

  In this way, by associating the degree of prize ball payout with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible for the player to easily transfer emotions to the liquid crystal effect, and to enhance the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

  In addition, by performing the jackpot game in the above-described second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, each round can be advanced based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game can be performed in a predetermined manner. It can progress over the production time. In other words, for example, when the ball wins in the first specific winning opening 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the time of the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of the moving image that is loop-reproduced for a predetermined rendering time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from ending before the effect during the big hit is completely viewed.

  In addition, when performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a support message from a character (such as “Try your best”) is displayed, the longer the time of the jackpot game, the easier it is to display a support message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thereby, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be advanced (rather happily) without giving stress to the player.

  On the other hand, it is also possible to display a mode in which the player gives more stress. For example, a case will be described in which a character that runs during a jackpot game is displayed, and that the character takes a break in a break area during an interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, the interval between rounds is reached each time a predetermined number of balls are won, so that the character can complete the run without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the eleventh round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the interval between rounds will not be reached unless the specified number of prizes have been won and the maximum value of the first operation time T1 (30 seconds) has to be waited. Therefore, the effect of accumulating fatigue can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between the rounds is short in the first place, the character can be produced. It is possible to perform the production that there is no time to rest. Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the exhausted character and give stress to the player, the ambition of the player to recover in the next big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, in the case where the same display is performed, an effect may be provided in which the character rehydrates at the timing of winning. In this case, while the first operation pattern can sufficiently supply water, in the eleventh and subsequent rounds of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the number of times of water supply (the number of winnings) is the first. Since the running period of the character (the period of the jackpot game) becomes longer as well as the operation pattern becomes shorter, the amount of water that can be replenished is shorter than the sweat from the character, and the character becomes tired more and more. A number of effects can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). As a result, it is possible to make the state of the character correspond to the profit (payout ball including time efficiency) obtained by the player, and to determine how much the jackpot that the player has won is , A jackpot or a super jackpot) can be easily recognized by the player through the effect of the entire jackpot game.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed has been described. However, the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment has the number of balls that can be stored inside. Is configured to be changeable. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the arrangement of the balls stored in the second storage channel 2251 when a ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255 a are illustrated by hidden lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a driving device 1500 similar to those of the first embodiment, and a body member slightly different from that of the first embodiment. 2100, a covered front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and further a second variable winning device 2800 newly introduced in the second embodiment. In addition, the second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable entry device 2800 includes a second specific winning opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a reference for payout passes in a big hit game.

  The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a which is normally closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). (Or until 10 balls are won), the operation of releasing is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Although the details will be described later, the opening operation can be performed in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern and fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large number of balls win the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  The main body member 2100 has the same configuration as the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the accommodating portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170). , A slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole formed in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is a through hole similarly formed in the thin plate member 1110 and which can be fitted with the second detection sensor 2255. A pair of wall portions arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and a drive guide rib 2183 extending linearly in the left and right direction; and a pair of drive guide ribs along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110. A transmission guide rib 2184 whose walls are arranged side by side in parallel and extend linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 21 that supports the transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800. And 5, a mainly includes.

  The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole for guiding the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 provided on the cover front plate 2200 is inserted.

  Each of the ribs 2183 and 2184 is a rib that guides a sliding operation of the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

  The covering front plate 2200 is connected to the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the housing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) provided in the housing front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second storage section 2250 is provided.

  The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of the thin plate formed at the surface position with the thin plate member 1210, has an upward opening, and has an end connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. The storage channel 2251 and the second detection disposed in the second storage channel 2251 in a posture near the upper end portion of the second storage channel 2251 with the opening along the direction in which the second storage channel 2251 extends. The sensor 2255 closes the space between the front plate of the second storage section 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the left side of the opening of the second storage channel 2251 in a front view, and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left. And an inclined surface 2257.

  When the sphere is stored by closing the discharge port 1150 when the sphere passes through the second detection sensor 2255 and is stored inside the second storage part 2250, the number of stored spheres is reduced. It is configured to be 14 at the maximum.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device that has the second specific winning opening 2255a and produces the same operation as the detection sensor 1240. In other words, when the ball enters the housing portion 1230 by switching the open / close plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball is switched via the second housing portion 2250 by the switching of the second variable winning device 2800. When the ball enters 1230, the ball is detected by the second detection sensor 2255.

  The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening and closing plate 1300 is provided. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage channel 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are directed to the channel forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. You. Therefore, during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open, the player opens any of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a. In the state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by performing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unskilled player can easily play a game.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is provided inside the second storage channel 2251 with a margin for arranging one ball on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing at which the remaining one ball becomes a specified number as it passes through the second detection sensor 2255), a plurality of balls continuously flow into the second storage channel 2251. And a structure in which a predetermined number or more of balls can enter.

  The regulating member 2600 has a configuration in which the regulating member 1600 of the first embodiment is provided (the shaft portion 1610, the extending portion 1620, and the ball receiving portion 1630), and the shaft portion 1610 is further extended leftward. A second extending portion 2640 formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction of FIG.

  The second extended portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates, as described later. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 allows the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening and closing plate 1300 to perform the switching operation of the second variable winning device 2800 and the switching operation of the opening and closing plate 1300. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

  The second variable winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left and right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and a mid-abdomen while one end is supported by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830, and extending from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100; A rod-shaped interposed rod portion 2850 having one end fixed to the member 2820 and slidably disposed inside the drive guide rib 2183, and a transmission guide rib having one end disposed at a position capable of abutting the interposed rod portion 2850. The other end extends along the inside of the second member 2184 and the other end of the second A transmission rod portion 2860 that is disposed against possible position, mainly comprises.

  The interposed rod portion 2850 is guided by the drive guide ribs 2183 in the left-right direction, while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured so as to be closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer (the distance between the drive guide ribs 2183 is narrowed). The movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

  The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided by the transmission guide rib 2184 in the up-down direction, while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured to be closer to each other (narrower between them) as the separation distance of the main body member 2100 from the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer, so that the transmission rod 2860 The movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

  Note that the surfaces of the end portions where the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. Thus, it is possible to smoothly transmit the force from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

  FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 has an arcuate cross-sectional shape on the opposite surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860, and the regulating member 2600 is directed toward the discharge state. The urging force of the urging torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod 2860 via the facing surface 2641. Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, it is determined that a ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable prize device 2800 for enabling a ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

  27 (a) to 27 (c), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. FIGS. 27A to 27C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. 27 (a) to 27 (c), for ease of understanding, illustration of components unnecessary for description is omitted, and the state of the slide plate 2840 changes from the closed state to the open state. Are illustrated in chronological order.

  In FIG. 27A, the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, and the tip member 2820 is located at the position farthest from the solenoid 2810. In FIG. 27B, immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the distal end member 2820 is disposed at the intermediate position in the movement range is disposed in a state in which the distal end member 2820 is drawn most toward the solenoid 2810 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). Each state is shown in the figure. In the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state for preventing the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255. In the state shown in FIG. , An open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, regulating member 2600 is in the discharged state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in the non-excited state, the operation of the second variable winning device 2800 can prevent the regulating member 2600 from being in the storage state. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, a control mode in which the operation of the solenoid 2810 is not generated (maintained without excitation) (for example, a control mode in the first embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

  When a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod 2860 via the interposed rod 2850 to start displacing. I do. Here, in the present embodiment, the portion where the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 contact each other is slightly separated in the state of FIG. The operation of the bar 2860 starts almost simultaneously.

  When the transmission rod 2860 is displaced downward by being pushed by the end of the interposition rod 2850, the lower end of the transmission rod 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extension 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is slightly pushed down, and is in the state between the discharge state and the storage state.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the distal end member 2830 has completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the end position by the intervening rod portion 2850, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27C, the interposed member 2850 slides from the transmission rod 2860 to the transmission rod 2860 by sliding so that the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod 2860. Can flow in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the interposition member 2850.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposition member 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the interposition member 2850 due to the fluctuation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. The load applied to the tip member 2820 via the regulating member 2600 can be prevented from fluctuating. Therefore, the driving of the solenoid 2810 for maintaining the slide plate 2840, which changes state due to the displacement of the tip member 2820, in the open state. It is possible to prevent the force from fluctuating. Thus, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

  Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod 2860, and the state of the regulating member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, the response of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. Thereby, fine adjustment of the state change timing of the regulating member 2600 is possible, so that it is possible to suppress a deviation between the control value of the discharge number specified for each round interval time in the jackpot game and the actual discharge number, The number of discharges can be stabilized.

  FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end of the transmission rod 2860 and the opposing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod 2860. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) for urging the regulating member 2600 toward the arrangement in the discharge state effectively acts on the transmission rod 2860.

  Accordingly, when the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) to the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the regulation by the intervening rod 2850 is released, the urging force of the torsion spring is released. As a result, the transmission rod 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

  FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol according to the present embodiment.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Note that the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is: The description is omitted because it is the same as that described in the first embodiment. In the following, a case in which a lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) results in a big hit in this embodiment. explain.

  Specifically, in the case of a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on entry to the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is associated with a jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

  When the big hit d is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the fourth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 (the details will be described later). In this case, the player can receive the payout of the number obtained by adding the limited increase to about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot e is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 99” (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

  In the case of the jackpot e, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fifth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 (details will be described later). In this case, the prize balls paid out to the player are the number of payouts obtained by adding a limited increase to 2250 prize balls, but the difficulty in increasing the number of payouts is smaller than that in the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the payout number is increased as well as the payout number, the time required for the jackpot game is much larger than the case of the jackpot d.

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn in a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the type of the big hit. Due to the difference in the operation patterns, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, and the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (the first to seventh round game R). When the first variable prize device 2000 receives more balls than the specified number, extra payouts are subtracted in the subsequent specific round game R (the eighth round game R) and the game proceeds to the eighth round. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the additional ball paid out by allowing the first variable prize device 2000 to enter a ball of a specified number or more can be obtained by the player without being deducted. It is configured as follows.

  In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, the game method in which the player can obtain the highest profit as the profit including the time efficiency is a fixed number of prizes until the eighth round, and the round game R after the ninth round The aim is to increase the number of payouts in order to win more than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to insert a predetermined number of balls or more in the first variable winning device 2000 depending on the round game R of the round, and the player's attention to the jackpot game Can be improved.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot d, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means sets the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R is started after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between the rounds.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls ejected from the outlet 1150 during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that in each round game R, more than 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 2255a. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum storage number when the ball is entered from the second storage channel 2251 side is set to 14, so in the jackpot game of the jackpot d, the number of winnings exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. It is limited to four through jackpot games. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that can be obtained by the player playing the jackpot game with the jackpot d can be limited to 60 (= 15 × 4C). As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from greatly changing due to a difference in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, and the like). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy profits fairly irrespective of the experience value of the player.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third round up to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 2810 controls the driving of the solenoid 2810 so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot e, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls ejected from the outlet 1150 during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that in each round game R, more than 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 2255a. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  Thereafter, similarly, the third to seventh round game Rs are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 interposed between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the seventh round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. After the elapsed time, the round game R of the eighth round is started.

  In the eighth round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the eighth round of the round game R, The open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eighth round is completed.

  Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, if balls exceeding the specified number have passed through the second specific winning opening 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the round R in the eighth round Since the balls remain in the storage channel 1231, only the winning of the number obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round) from the specified number in the round game R of the eighth round can be performed. Therefore, the payout of the prize balls including the eighth round is equalized to the payout of the specified number of prize balls up to the eighth round. In addition, since the specified number of pachinko balls cannot be won in the eighth round of the round game R, the player must wait 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, before the next round. It will shift to the game.

  Therefore, the player suffers from the loss of the prize balls paid out by the 7th round being lost, and the time loss that the round R of the 8th round becomes unnecessarily long. Will receive. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game carefully so as not to win more balls than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of winning of a ball exceeding the specified number, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

  If there is no winning exceeding the specified number by the seventh round, the specified number of balls can be passed through the one specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the specified number of balls are paid out. In addition, the round game R of the eighth round can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, a predetermined number of prize balls can be paid out while advancing the round game R quickly.

  Therefore, in the big hit game of the big hit e, intentionally suppressing winnings exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round leads to the player's profit. Therefore, the player's attention in the game up to the seventh round can be kept high.

  When the big hit game R of the eighth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After a lapse of time Int1, a ninth round game R is started. Note that, at the start of the ninth round of the round game R, a state in which no ball remains in the storage channel 1231 can be set.

  In the ninth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is controlled to drive the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the ninth round, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the ninth round of the round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the tenth round to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In the round game R of the ninth and subsequent rounds, since the opening and closing plate 1300 does not perform the opening and closing operation, the prize balls paid out by the balls that have won the second specific winning opening 2255a in excess of the specified number after the ninth round are , Can be received by the player without being deducted.

  Therefore, in the case of performing the jackpot game of the jackpot e, the jackpot game R is suppressed so that the winning in the second specific winning opening 2255a exceeding the specified number does not occur in the jackpot game R up to the seventh round. Aiming for a prize in the second specific prize port 2255a exceeding the number is a game method in which a player can obtain the largest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

  That is, in the round game R of each round, by inserting balls exceeding the specified number into the second specific winning opening 2255a, it is possible to cause a case where the player gains profit and a case where the player suffers damage. Thereby, different playability can be provided for each round of the jackpot game, and the attention of the player who performs the jackpot game can be improved (it is possible to prevent the casual play of the jackpot game). .

  Further, according to the present operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive the payout of the additional prize ball by causing the second specific winning opening 2255a to win the ball exceeding the specified number is substantially performed after the ninth round. Can be restricted. This makes it possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to a difference in game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.), and to prevent a large change in the payout balls. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy profits fairly irrespective of the experience value of the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the sphere that reaches the flow path forming portion when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state and flows down to the downstream of the open / close plate 1300 when the open / close plate is in the open state falls as it is. In the first variable winning device 3000, the falling of the ball is delayed when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, and a part of the ball can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of a first variable winning device 3000 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. It is a rear surface perspective view of the installation front board 3200.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an open / close plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a regulating member 1600, and a rear cover 1700 similar to those of the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a covered front plate 3200 slightly different from those of the first embodiment are provided. FIG. 32 shows a closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  The main body member 3100 has the same configuration as the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the accommodating portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170). An additional winning opening 3181 arranged in a manner to be connected to the left side wall of the covering front plate 3200 in front view on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and upward from the left side wall portion of the additional winning opening 3181 in front view. And a curved extension plate 3182 which extends in a curved manner.

  The additional winning opening 3181 is a ball opening for discharging a ball flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and when balls enter the additional winning opening 3181, the upper limit is 15 balls. Prize balls are paid out. In the present embodiment, it is set so that eleven balls are paid out.

  The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts the passage of a ball flowing down the game area by setting the gap in the up-down direction in the game area to be equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. . In addition, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed to have a shape that is inclined downward from the middle abdomen toward the left in front view, and is inclined downward from the middle abdomen toward the right to the front view.

  The laid front plate 3200 has a structure (a thin plate member 1210, a side wall portion 1220, a housing portion 1230, and a detection sensor 1240) included in the laid front plate 1200 of the first embodiment, and a space between the side wall portion 1220 and the housing portion 1230. , A drop delay plate 3250 extending from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface.

  The drop delay plate 3250 is disposed on the front side of the movement trajectory of the open / close plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the open / close plate 3250, and is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the open / close plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. An extended plate portion 3251 that extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 and connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 and has a concave upper surface from a curved shape. And a rolling arc portion 3252 to be formed.

  The drop delay plate 3250 has a long shape to the left and right, and is decelerated so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down (including bouncing and rolling down) a distance of half the length of the plate. Formed from the shape In addition, the opening / closing plate 1300 is formed in a mode in which the ball flows down in one second or less when the ball flows down a half distance of the length of the plate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the extension plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed so as to be inclined such that the closer the detection sensor 1240 is, the longer the separation width from the main body member 3100 is. The housing includes a facing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b that faces the side wall portion 1220 of the housing portion 1230 and is spaced from the housing portion 1230 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is determined by the radius of the sphere at the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). At the intermediate position (the middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32), the distance is switched to be equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere. The diameter is equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the opposing surface 3251 a is formed along the front-rear direction, and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 3200. (Tangent lines drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction are along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

  The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the sphere that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covered front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the most upstream upstream position Pf1 to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls away from the rolling arc portion 3252, is moved to the downstream position Pf2. Flow down through

  In the present embodiment, since the distance between the facing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3250 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the distance until the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3 is reached. , Is prevented from falling through the rolling arc portion 3252. Therefore, the ball will fall from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, the manner in which the ball flows down on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

  34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable prize device 3000 along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. Note that FIG. 34B illustrates a sphere arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34C illustrates a sphere arranged at the downstream position Pf2. In FIG. 34, the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c), the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and contacts the plate portion 1310. The diameter of the ball, which flows down to the contact portion with the falling delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the sphere in the axial direction), is reduced as the ball flows down.

  That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34B, the diameter r1 up to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the drop delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34 (c), the radial length r2 up to the portion where the ball contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the ball.

  These diameter lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of gyration of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In other words, if the rotation speed of the ball is the same, the rolling speed of the ball decreases (the ball is delayed) as the diameter lengths r1 and r2 are shorter. According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Accordingly, the turning radius of the sphere is gradually reduced as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 31). Accordingly, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced as the ball flows down the falling delay plate 3250 to the downstream side.

  Further, when the extension plate portion 3251 extends along the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300, FIG. 34 (c) showing the axial view thereof shows a state as compared with the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). The ball is displaced downward in the state shown in parentheses). That is, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the ball can be separated from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be diverted from the first specific winning opening 1000a. it can.

  Accordingly, even if the ball entry preventing portion 1331 is not formed on the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the falling delay plate 3250 to the downstream end, and is directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is won by flying.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rises to the open state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable prize device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) is the first variable prize device 3000 along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. Note that FIG. 35 (a) illustrates the closed state of the open / close plate 1300, FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c) illustrate the open state of the open / close plate 1300, and FIG. 35 (c) illustrates the open / close plate 1300. The outer shapes of the plate portion 1310 and the ball in the closed state are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 35A and 35B illustrate an example of a ball that has entered the flow path forming unit of the first variable winning device 3000.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the open / close plate 1300 is closed, the ball that has landed on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 moves rightward in a front view along the extending direction of the extension plate portion 3251. If the open / close plate 1300 keeps the closed state as it is, it falls after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the above-described extension plate portion 3251, so that the rolling time of the ball can be maintained long and the attention to the ball can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the open / close plate 1300 moves upward (rotates) toward the open state while the ball rolls, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly moves up along the arc shape of the dynamic arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent of the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the ball abuts at the start of the movement of the ball is oriented in the front-rear direction, the operation of the ball at the start of the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be smoothed. it can.

  The downflow direction when the sphere moves up and rolls over the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 and flows down is parallel to the downflow direction illustrated in FIG. Therefore, compared to the case where the flowing direction of the ball changes completely different directions before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player who visually recognizes the operation of the ball before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300. it can.

  As described above, when the sphere is arranged below the plate portion 1310 of the open / close plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35C), the sphere is opened by the upward movement of the open / close plate 1300. By pushing back (backflow) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the above, it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the ball which is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 and once cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a is brought into a state where it can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a by ascending movement. Since it can be returned, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In other words, FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) both show a state where the sphere is arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240 since there is still a possibility that the sphere passes through the detection sensor 1240. It can be said that. That is, by the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state.

  Further, even when it becomes impossible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 flows down in a direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player may win the first specific winning opening 1000a, and to maintain the player's attention.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the open / close plate 1300 forms a closed state, the fall of the ball reaching the front side of the open / close plate 1300 is delayed, and when the open / close plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By configuring so that it can be resurrected above, it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball that arrives in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. As a result, the number of balls passing through the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening and closing plate 1300 from being hindered due to the arrangement of the ball on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure in which the ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate as in a conventional gaming machine, the ball is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate and the glass plate by operating the opening / closing plate, thereby opening and closing the ball. There has been a problem that the opening of the board is hindered, which may cause a loss to the player.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 in front of the opening / closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained substantially constant (restriction). can do. Therefore, the ball is pinched between the open / close plate 1300 and the glass plate as compared with the case where the ball freely flows down the front side of the open / close plate 1300 and the distance of the ball from the rotation axis changes freely. The risk that the operation of the plate 1300 is hindered can be reduced. Note that, in the present embodiment, the sphere is sandwiched between the glass plate and the opening / closing plate 1300 while the opening / closing plate 1300 is changing to the open state, and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 may be hindered. The drop delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the ball is maintained at the position.

  36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the manner in which the ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000 flows down. In FIG. 36 (a), in a case where the ball is hit and left, the two balls reaching the first variable prize device 3000 flow down in a time-series manner, and in FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball By performing a special hitting method (so-called “twisting”) in which the ball is hit weakly and the second ball is hit harder, the ball when two balls are connected to reach the first variable winning device 3000. Are shown in chronological order.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the ball is hit and the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a predetermined interval, the ball is hit. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state due to the winning of the first specific winning opening 1000a by P1, the ball P2 can still be in a state arranged on the upstream side of the drop delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 completely flows down the drop delay plate 3250, so that the ball can be easily maintained on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. Can be.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when two balls continuously reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball P1 wins the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. When switching to the state, the ball P2 is arranged near the position (falling position Pf3) immediately before the detection sensor 1240, so that it is not possible to wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is next opened, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from plate 3250.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, compared to the case where two balls flow down consecutively by a special hitting method, the case where two balls flow down at a predetermined interval by releasing (normal hitting) is used. This makes it easier to receive the action of the drop delay plate 3250 (changing a ball that has reached the front of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the interval time between rounds so that the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game by a special hitting method such as twisting.

  FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. FIG. 37 illustrates a state immediately after the state of the open / close plate 1300 changed from the closed state to the open state, and illustrates a sphere that jumps upward by colliding with the open / close plate 1300.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open / close plate 1300 in the open state, the bouncing as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball that has landed on the open / close plate 1300 is rebounded during the upward movement of the open / close plate 1300. Only in this case, the sphere bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

  The subsequent flow of the bouncing ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 again or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. Is done. Therefore, the player can receive the prize ball by the bouncing ball. Therefore, a ball that arrives at the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening / closing plate 1300 is being switched to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66, and the player cannot obtain a profit. Can be prevented.

  Further, even when a ball wins in the additional winning opening 3181, a prescribed number (ten in the present embodiment) of balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a separately. The payout by winning the mouth 3181 results in award balls (a profit for an additional amount) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, it is possible to cause a difference in the profit obtained by the player depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening and closing plate 1300 is being switched to the open state. , It is possible to improve the attention of the ball that flows down.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a specially changed state (high probability state) of a special symbol is given as an added value after the end of the jackpot regardless of a difference in a flow state of a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 according to the fourth embodiment includes a probability variation determination unit that determines a right to shift to a certain symbol change state (high-probability state) of a special symbol based on a difference in the manner in which a ball flows. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is shown in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 below the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability variation that is provided on the back side of the game board 13 is changed. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (a main body member 1100, a covering front plate 1200, an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a regulating agent). 1600 and a rear cover 1700), and further includes a new probability variation determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

  The probability variation determination unit 4800 includes a communication path 4810 that is a flow path through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows and extends vertically downward, and a bifurcated flow that is communicated with the lower end of the communication path 4810. The probability variation determination channel 4820 that is a road, the specific region 4830 that is arranged to communicate from the channel on the left side in front view of the probability variation determination channel 4820, and the specific region 4830 that communicates from the channel on the right side in front view A non-specific area 4840, a distribution device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with a game ball at a branch portion of the probability variation determination channel 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 for detecting the passage of a game ball in the specific area 4830, A non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area 4540.

  The communication path 4810 is formed to have a length that elapses approximately one second until the ball that has entered from the outlet reaches the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  The distribution device 4850 is disposed so as to protrude inside the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and allows the sphere to flow down to the specific area 4830 (forms an open state) and to flow to the non-specific area 4840 (changes to the closed state). It mainly includes a distributing member 4851 operable between a closed position (formed) and a solenoid 4852 for driving the distributing member 4851.

  The probability change determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding the acquisition of the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state) only in the special round during the jackpot game (the fifth round in this embodiment). In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game balls to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in an open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in a closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the big hit game, a transition is made to a special symbol positive change state (high probability state). In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased, so that the ball can easily win the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, 40 It is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1 /

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination.

  In the present embodiment, five types of special symbols such as “big hit D”, “big hit E”, “big hit F”, “big hit G”, and “big hit f” are provided (see FIG. 40). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 4000 and The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state).

  FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type of the entrance that triggered the symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is associated with a jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot D, five jackpot games are executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot E is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 49” (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot E, a 5-round jackpot game is executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 675 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state).

  The jackpot F is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 79” (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot F, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot G is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99” (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot G, a 5-round jackpot game is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 750 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift to the surely changed state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) with a probability of 50%. Can be reliably obtained. On the other hand, even in the remaining 50%, it is possible to rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, The jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot f, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850, as in the case of the jackpot D. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot g is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “95 to 99” (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot is g, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls and, rarely, can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state).

  As described above, if a special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) becomes a big hit, the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 have a 95% probability of the sixth variable prize device. Operates in an operating pattern. At this time, it is possible to almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the specially changed state (high probability state) of the special symbol, so that the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64). This is advantageous for the player as compared to a case of a jackpot. Therefore, in order to obtain a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), in the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player performs a right-handed game. Do.

  During the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol decreases (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the normal symbol hit increases (1). Second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is reached, the jackpot f (almost certainly shifts to the special symbol probable change state (high probability state)) It is easy for the player to easily acquire a large amount of prize balls, because the probability of the special symbol being easily changed is likely to be repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41 (b) is a first specific winning in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the sixth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 is controlled so as to be maintained, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round game R is started.

  In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the third round of round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the third round of the round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the third round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, thereby obtaining the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the lapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and the solenoid is operated so as to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has elapsed. The driving of the 4852 is controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. The predetermined time is set as a time during which the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the maximum speed, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is estimated normally that only about five balls can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round is completed only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in this operation pattern, in the interval immediately before the fourth round, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150. Therefore, since the storage channel 1231 is filled with approximately five winnings in three seconds, it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity given to the player due to the shorter time of the round R in the fourth round than in other rounds. can do.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In the second opening time OP2, when the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of stored balls is up to six), all the discharged balls are in the probability variation determination channel 4820. When the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is seven or more (when the number of stored balls is seven or more), at least one of the discharged balls is used. The time is set to be shorter than the time when the sphere of the part passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In the present embodiment, since the fourth round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, even if the fourth round game ends in the second operation time T2, The number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily increased to seven or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the ball remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the remaining ball can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, unlike the prior art, in the present operation pattern, in the fifth round of the round game R, it is not necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation. In addition, the opening and closing plate 1300 can be operated without discomfort. Hereinafter, this will be described.

  In the related art, when a predetermined number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the operation of the distribution operation member 4581 starts, and the round game R ends, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. However, there is a risk that a ball may not be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the player may not be able to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state). In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the open / close plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 was closed before the operation (it was opened twice in one round).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since it is a game property that switches whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a can be made to enter the specific area 4830 by the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round. Even if the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. Since the ball heading for the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable prize device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) without any problem.

  Therefore, in the present operation pattern, the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened so that the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be performed even while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the fifth round of the round game R. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it prevents a problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the winning pattern. can do.

  In addition, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R stays in the storage channel 1231 during the first operation time T1, so that the first ball is won in the fifth round game R. It is possible to prevent a ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination channel 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. Thereby, the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) according to the mode of winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent a problem that whether or not it can be changed occurs.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot E, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as the sixth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, thereby obtaining the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the lapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and the solenoid is operated so as to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has elapsed. The driving of the 4852 is controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass to the specific region 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the maximum speed, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is estimated normally that only about five balls can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round is completed only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in the present operation pattern, in the interval immediately before the fourth round, ten balls (all spheres) are discharged from the discharge port 1150. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled with approximately five possible prizes in three seconds, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the sphere won in three seconds remaining in the storage channel 1231. .

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, since about five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fifth round game R, eight or more balls are ejected in three seconds for three seconds due to some rare causes. As long as the ball does not win 1000a, the distributing operation member 4851 is displaced after all the ejected balls have passed through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, no ball remains in the probability variation determination channel 4820, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the open / close plate 1300 and the distributing member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in can be obtained.

  Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the ball can be stored to near the fullness of the storage channel 1231 during the fourth round of the round game R. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high-probability state) of the special symbol, depending on the difference in how the ball is stored, so that the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231. Attention to the ball can be improved. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the first variable winning device 4000.

  Also, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter in the fourth round of the round game R, it is almost certain that the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) is obtained. Although it is possible, since the time of the round game R is short, the more the player is accustomed to the game, the more the player loses the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

  In other words, an unfamiliar player is easier to hit and play during a jackpot game, while a person who is more accustomed to the game is more likely to avoid hitting to avoid wasting balls between rounds during the jackpot and to make it easier to stop between rounds Is the difference resulting from

  More specifically, in the case of an open game, a plurality of balls always flow in the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300, and the ball is prized to the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. Because it occurs, if there are even three seconds, there is enough room for three or more balls to enter. Therefore, an unskilled player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) without any problem.

  On the other hand, in the case of starting the launch after the start of the fourth round of the round game R and performing the stop between the rounds so as to prevent the ball from flowing near the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval period, the useless ball is certainly Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300 until a while after the start of the round game R of the fourth round (for example, two seconds have not elapsed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining one second, which makes it difficult to acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state). Therefore, even a player who is accustomed to the game can be encouraged to make a launch without hitting during the jackpot game.

  As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent risk that, depending on the mode of launching, a person who is more accustomed to the game may decrease the profit obtained. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed, the player can be encouraged to play the game without hitting the jackpot, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be secured.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, after grasping the above-mentioned risks, it is possible to provide a player who still stops between rounds with a jackpot game requiring concentration, which cannot be enjoyed by other pachinko machines 10. . That is, the number of useless balls is reduced by performing an inter-round hitting operation in which the ball is started backward by calculating backward so that the ball flows into the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round. Meanwhile, the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) can also be acquired. In this case, a stop between rounds is performed before the end of the third round game R, and a launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, it is necessary to perform a high-level calculation of starting the launch while predicting the timing of the ball entry while considering the randomness of the flow of the ball entering the ball during the third round game R. Therefore, if the timing at which the ball that has started launching reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning opening 1000a is as calculated, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is a first specific winning in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot F, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the third round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved to the open position. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round game R, and the fourth round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Is terminated by the passage of.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. Note that this opening operation is performed simultaneously with the opening operation due to the elapse of the third opening time OP3.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the ejected balls pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  In this operation pattern, since the fourth round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the fourth round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is seven or more, the distribution operation member 4851 may be opened with the balls remaining in the probability variation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the open / close plate 1300 and the distributing member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in can be obtained.

<When operating in the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is similar to that of the eighth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved to the open position. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round game R, and the fourth round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Is terminated by the passage of.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distributing operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass to the specific region 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the ejected balls pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the fourth round of the round game R is started in a state in which no balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the fourth round of the round game R, a specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to end the fourth round of the round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1. However, when the fourth round game R is completed without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1 as in the case where the fourth round game R is ended by a predetermined number of winnings, in many cases, Immediately after that, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820, and then the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced.

  On the other hand, when the distributing operation member 4851 ends the round game R of the fourth round until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is over, if seven or more balls are ejected in the interval immediately after that, The sphere can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not hurry to win the specified number of prizes, but makes the first specified winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls immediately before the end of the fourth round of the round game R, so that the player has a special symbol. The right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) can be obtained.

  Also, as another method, by ending the fifth round of the round game R immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the ball ejected at the interval immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is stored in the specific area. By flowing down, the player can also acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable state (high probability state).

  As described above, according to the present operation pattern, at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, etc.), the player can change to the certain state of the special symbol (high probability state). Whether or not the right to transfer can be acquired can be made different.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the round game R of the fourth round is specified. When the operation time is specified (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), the player continues to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a so that the player can play the special symbol no matter how the game is played. The right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) can be acquired, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the operation time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player himself / herself selects the operation time according to the game mode (when the specified number of balls are to be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a). In some cases), the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) may be acquired in some cases. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player a sense of excitement to acquire a probable change state by himself. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  The sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern are characterized in that the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is shorter than usual, and the fourth round of the round game with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 is performed. When R is started, it is easy to obtain the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state). That is, when the number of award balls obtained in the round game R of the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is set to such a length as to discharge the ball in the storage channel 1231 as a whole ball, the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state) is granted. Difficult to get. That is, in the case where it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, it is possible to realize the gaming property that the payout of the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game increases. Thereby, a large number of balls to be launched by the player in the normal state to be continued later can be prepared, so that the player's cash investment can be easily suppressed.

  These differences can be grasped at the start of the fourth round by whether or not balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, at the start of the fourth round of the round game R, the player predicts a state after the end of the big hit game. can do. Even in the case of an operation pattern in which it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol state (high-probability state), the right to shift to the special symbol transition state (high-probability state) depends on the manner of the ball entry. Can be obtained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, by forcing the player to make a selection, the concentration of the player during the jackpot game can be maintained. That is, the game mode in which it is easy to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) is exactly the opposite.

  More specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the round game R of the fourth round, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. Winning a prize increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to a special symbol probable state (high probability state) (it is beneficial to win many balls from the start of the fourth round). In the case of the operation pattern of No. 9, in the round game R of the fourth round, a predetermined number of balls are awarded until the end of 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and the period of the round game R is extended. As a result, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) is increased (it is advantageous to suppress the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

  As described above, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) changes depending on how the ball is won in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to maintain the concentration on the game.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the tenth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the fourth round of the round game R is the same as in the case of the above-described sixth operation pattern, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distributing operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In the present operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the lapse of the second opening time OP2 is performed for a short time, the ball cannot basically flow down to the specific area 4830.

  In addition, since the distribution operation member 4851 is opened during the round R of the fifth round, if the round game can be completed early, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. Although there is a possibility that the game will be performed (for example, when the operation after the lapse of the third opening time OP3 is long), in the present operation pattern, the fifth round of the round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be entered, and the fifth round game cannot be ended early. Therefore, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distributing operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R has the same portions as those in the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of No. 6 can be obtained.

  Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the fourth round game R. Since the pattern of the other portions is the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  The tenth operation pattern causes the ball to flow down to the specific area 4830 even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the fourth round of the round game R in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern. They differ in that they cannot.

  That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not relieved even if the ball can be fully stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the game R, and the discharged ball is in the specific area. The user can be prompted to confirm whether to pass 4830 or not. That is, in the jackpot game, a stage (first step) of determining whether or not a ball can be stored in the storage channel 1231, and the distribution operation member 4851 operates before the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes. It is possible to focus on a different part for each stage, divided into the stage of whether or not (second step). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game unintentionally, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where a pitch corresponding to the jackpot type can be acquired regardless of the progress of the game in the special symbol change state (high probability state). However, the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment is described. 5000 is provided with a pitch adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to obtain more pitches as the number of times of change until the jackpot is obtained in the special symbol change state (high probability state) is smaller. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, a covered front plate 2200, In addition to the opening and closing plate 1300, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, An outgoing ball adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the outgoing ball by causing the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 to enter the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is mainly provided.

  The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 that extends downward from the lower end of the rotating tip 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the lower end of the time difference forming portion 5423 extends to a position where the time difference forming portion 5423 contacts the engaging portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is not excited.

  In addition to the configuration described in the second embodiment, the second variable prize device 5800 is configured such that an interposed rod portion 5850 having a slightly added shape and a sliding operation in a vertical direction on the left side in rear view of the transmission rod portion 2860, By being pushed down by the branched portion of the interposed rod portion 5850 (the L-shaped portion in the rear view added to the configuration of the interposed rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment), the interposed rod portion 5850 is arranged so as to be in contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the pitching adjustment device 5900. A pressing action portion 5870 is provided.

  The outgoing ball adjusting device 5900 includes a flowing-down passage forming portion 5910 that allows a ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 to flow down, and a lower end portion of the flowing-down passage forming portion 5910 that penetrates the thin plate member 1100 of the main body member 2100 and stores the ball. A communication hole 5920 arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) in which a ball can flow into the flow path 1231 and an opening / closing member 5930 for opening and closing the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are mainly provided. Prepare for. It should be noted that the flow-down path forming portion 5910 is disposed in a manner to pass through the back side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, and is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. Also, illustration of the intermediate portion is omitted.

  The flow-down path forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path through which the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 flows down. The opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920, and the ball is transferred to the communication hole 5920. The adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in, and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceeds the specified number (30 in the present embodiment), and then enters the second ball entrance 640. And a surplus sphere discharge channel 5915 for discharging the collected spheres to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The adjustment flow channel 5911 is formed as a deceleration flow channel 5912 formed as a reverse U-shaped flow channel that is curved by a half turn near the lower end, and a second ball entrance 640 is formed from the upper end of the deceleration flow channel 5912. And a falling channel 5913 extending vertically in the rearward direction.

  Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the load of the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent sphere stagnating in the deceleration flow path 5912 is reduced irrespective of the number of stagnation balls. be able to. In other words, when the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the own weight of the subsequent ball from the subsequent ball, the deceleration flow path 5912 assumes that the inclination near the communication hole 5920 is gentle (inclination close to horizontal). Therefore, the effect of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of stagnation balls, the speed at which the sphere immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the sphere to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

  Since the falling channel 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the falling sphere does not receive deceleration and falls freely. Therefore, when a ball continues to enter the second entrance 640 and enters the ball, the preceding ball is decelerated earlier than the subsequent ball, and impedes the flow of the subsequent ball. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the surplus sphere discharge channel 5915.

  In the present embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the balls to stay in order from just before the communication hole 5920, and when the number of the staying balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball becomes the excess ball discharge flow path 5915. The flow path length is designed to be above the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the ball after the 31st ball enters the surplus sphere discharge channel 5915. In other words, up to 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the high probability state of 30 rotations. During this time, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and the player can proceed with the game by a right-handed game, thereby aiming for the next jackpot acquisition while suppressing ball loss. On the other hand, since the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 enters the adjustment channel 5911, the ball stays in the adjustment channel 5911 from the start of the high-probability state to the end of the high-probability state. The sphere increases.

  The opening / closing member 5930 is arranged at a position protruding inside the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not excited, and closes the opening below the outer shape of the sphere, while one of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is excited. Accordingly, the movable closing member 5931 disposed at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, the movable closing member 5931 is connected to the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and is movable in the left-right direction with the driving of the solenoid 1510. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110; and a slide rail portion 5933 provided at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 so as to be vertically movable relative to the connecting rod portion 5932. One end of the connecting rod portion 5932 is provided to apply an upward urging force to the movable closing member 5931. An elastic spring 5934, mainly comprising.

  FIGS. 46A and 46B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 along the line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. FIG. 46A illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is opened, and FIG. 46B illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and the sphere flows into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920 and can stay there, the third ball AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231. The fourth ball AP54 is kept at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920.

  In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) having passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a in this state flows into the storage channel 1231. The space for the ball AP 54 held at a position where the ball AP 54 does not fall out of the 5920 to enter the storage channel 1231 is filled with the flowed ball IP 51. Therefore, the ball retained at a position where it does not escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 and is maintained at the same position.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the restricting member 2600 changes to the discharge state, the movable closing member 5931 moves from the overhang adjustment flow channel 5911 to the storage flow channel 1231. Ball inflow is regulated.

  When the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is completed, the state is switched again to the state shown in FIG. 46A, and the sphere AP54, which has been retained at a position where it has not been removed from the communication hole 5920, becomes the top and the third sphere The ball up to flows into the storage channel 1231.

  In the jackpot game, the inflow of the sphere from the adjustment flow channel 5911 to the storage flow channel 1231 is repeated as described above, and the inflow is regulated at a maximum of three times per one opening of the communication hole 5920. You.

  With reference to FIG. 47, a case where the jackpot game proceeds by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. FIGS. 47A to 47C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

  In FIG. 47 (a), the state where the solenoid 1510 is excited is shown. In FIG. 47 (b), the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the tip of the time difference forming section 5423 is on the rear side of the engaging section 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. FIG. 47 (c) illustrates a state in which the time lag forming portion 5423 is disposed above the engagement portion 1333, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened when the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass.

  When the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves along with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920, while engaging the opening / closing plate 1300. The portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction, and the movement of the open / close plate 1300 is regulated, so that the regulating member 2600 maintains the stored state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the regulating member 2600 is in the discharging state, and the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, in driving the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started. Balls can be prevented from flowing from 5911.

  FIGS. 48A and 48B are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the operation of the regulating member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 by the driving of the solenoid 2810 is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 48A illustrates a state where the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited, and FIG. 48B illustrates a state where the solenoid 2810 is excited.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the movable closing member 5931 is pushed down by the pressing action portion 5870, so that the communication hole 5920 is opened. This allows the sphere to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the urging force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  Accordingly, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened and the ball can flow into the storage channel 1231 while the communication hole 5920 is de-energized. It is closed and the inflow into the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

  In the big hit game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the above-described mechanism, a fixed number (three in the present embodiment) of balls are flown into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes With a probability of 1, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, and the special symbol lottery 30 times It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased, so that the ball can easily win the second entrance 640.

  In this embodiment, three types of special symbols, "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i", are provided (see FIG. 49). Although details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a are differently configured depending on the jackpot type, so that the number of balls that enter the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Be composed.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type of the entrance that triggered the symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”. Is associated with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", and the big hit h Are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

  When the jackpot H or the jackpot h is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive the payout of approximately 2250 prize balls, can win the specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive the payout of the specified upper limit.

  In the case of a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the big hit i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

  When the big hit i is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the payout number of the prize balls and the time required for the jackpot game are made variable depending on the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is obtained.

  In other words, when a special pattern 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), a specified number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big hit, In the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), according to the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is obtained, a prize ball is obtained. Since the maximum number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the gaming ability of acquiring a jackpot in a right-handed game is different from the gaming ability of paying out prize balls depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs. Sex can be added. This makes it possible to prevent the right-handed game from being played indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the attention to each change.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing the time change in the twelfth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the eleventh operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  In the first round of the round game R, the communication hole 5920 is opened with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). When storing the spheres from the second storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 balls can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so that how many (1 to 1) spheres flow from the communication hole 5920 can be stored. Even if it is 3), the round game R can be ended by winning the specified number (10C).

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means sets the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. , And after the third interval time Int3 between rounds has elapsed, the second round game R is started. Here, a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 at intervals of 3 seconds, so that at the end of the first round of the round game R, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251 Spheres (up to 14 spheres) that can be stored in a row can be discharged globally.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third round up to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int3 interposed between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 2810 controls the driving of the solenoid 2810 so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 from the adjustment channel 5911 every time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excited). Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the entire sphere is stored until the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the tenth round game R). Since the ball can enter the road 1231, the big hit game can be ended without the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating in the twelfth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot i, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed. The operation up to the fourth round of the round game R is the same as that of the eleventh operation pattern, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, although it is possible for the ball to flow from the through hole 5920 even in the round game R of the fifth round, unlike the fourth round, the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the balls are actually flown from the through holes 5920, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls obtained in the fifth round of the round game R of the present operation pattern is smaller than the number of prize balls obtained in the same round game R in the eleventh operation pattern, and the first prize ball is obtained. Since the end of the round game R is to be waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the big hit game is prolonged.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the sixth to fifteenth rounds is repeated with the third interval time Int3 between the rounds between each round game R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time between rounds Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In the present operation pattern, the decrease in the number of award balls that can occur in the subsequent round game R from the fifth round game R and the extension of the round time mean that a ball flows from the through hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231. Depending on the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the big hit, the degree to which the number of winning balls decreases and the round time is extended changes. The number of spheres remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of spheres passing through the second entrance 640, while the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the second entrance) 640), the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 is related to the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2.

  In the following description, in the present operation pattern, the number of times of the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) and the number of the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Are described assuming that they have the same number.

  As described above, in the jackpot game of the present operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a once. That is, up to twelve balls have already flowed into the storage channel 1231 before the fourth round of the round game R. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the ball flows into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 because the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911. Is the case. In other words, this is a case where the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) has been received 13 times or more after the transition to the high probability state. .

  Therefore, if the jackpot is obtained between the transition to the high probability state and the reception of the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry to the second entrance 640) 12 times, the number of award balls decreases. And the extension of the round time does not occur, so that the player's attention to acquiring the jackpot by the 12th lottery can be improved.

  In addition, even after the thirteenth lottery, the number of prize balls decreases for each one lottery, and the round time is extended for each three lotteries. Attention can be improved.

  That is, for example, when a jackpot is acquired in a state where 14 balls remain in the adjustment channel 5911 (the 14th lottery of the special symbol 2), the ball is stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the flow channel 1231 is two, the number that can be won in this round is eight. When a jackpot is won in a state where 15 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the 15th lottery of the special symbol 2), the storage flow path passes through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the 1231 is three, the number that can be won in this round is seven. Therefore, as the number of remaining balls increases, the number of prize balls paid out in the fifth round of round R decreases.

  On the other hand, in the case where the jackpot is won in the thirteenth to fifteenth lotteries, in any case, the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 flows into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R. Is zero. Therefore, from the sixth round game R, a specified number of balls can be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a, thereby completing the sixth round game R. No change occurs in the degree of extension.

  In addition, when the number of remaining adjustment channels 5911 when the jackpot is acquired is 16 to 18, in the round game R of the sixth round, and when 19 to 21, the number of adjustment channels 5911 is 22 to 24 in the round game R of the seventh round. In the number of rounds, the number of prize balls decreases in the round game R of the eighth round, in the round game R of the ninth round, in the case of 25 to 27, in the round game R of the ninth round, and in the round game R of the tenth round, in the case of 28 to 30. And the round time is prolonged.

  Thereby, as in the present embodiment, in the gaming property in which the high-probability state ends with the number of lotteries, in the case where the jackpot is acquired shortly after the transition to the high-probability state, and in the case where the jackpot is acquired just before the end of the high-probability state. Thus, it is possible to make a difference in the profit (number of payouts of prize balls, progress time of the jackpot game, etc.) given to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the profit given to the player is reduced as the number of lotteries from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot acquisition is increased, if the number of lotteries until the jackpot acquisition is small, Originally, there should have been a chance to receive a lottery with a high probability even with the remaining number of lotteries, but it is possible to partially eliminate the player's dissatisfaction that the lottery cannot be received.

  In other words, if the jackpot was won in the first lottery after the high probability state was reached, the remaining 29 lotteries should be added and the next 59 lotteries could be received. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to 30 times again can be partially solved. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

  In addition, even in the high probability state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the second specific winning port 2255a is set in the eleventh operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout irrespective of the number of lotteries after opening and closing and shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may play a game (left-handed game) aiming at winning the ball in the first entrance 64 in the high probability state.

  In this case, as compared with the case of performing a right-handed game, the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 is increased without leading to the special symbol lottery, the interval at which the lottery can be received becomes longer, and the game time becomes longer. May be longer.

  Therefore, as a method of playing in the high-probability state, the player may be able to receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time while suppressing the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is obtained. Do you aim for the jackpot of jackpot h) (whether you play a right-handed game) or increase the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is acquired, and expect that the game time will be longer, It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim for a jackpot of a jackpot type (jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of a decrease in the prize ball in (a left-handed game). As a result, it is possible to widen the range of the game method to be selected depending on the player's taste and the situation where the player is placed (playable time or the like).

  After the high probability state ends, the second entrance 640 becomes difficult to open, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment channel 5911, but in the case of the jackpot type (big hit H) that can be obtained in the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by the specified number of prizes, the profit given to the player (the profit in both the number of prize balls and the game time) is not impaired. Therefore, even when the player stops playing the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being lost. A player can start a game at an arbitrary timing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (the lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) and the number of the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (the second entry ball) The description has been made assuming that the number of balls entering the mouth 640) is the same. However, in an actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the time of obtaining the jackpot is the number of balls of the special symbol 2 until the jackpot is obtained. It should be noted that the number of lotteries is rarely the same.

  That is, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed when a ball is won at the second entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the lottery has won the jackpot in the subsequent reach production or , After a button press effect, etc., it is normal for the player to continue to hit the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since up to four balls can be held in the second entrance 640, a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player receives a lottery efficiently, a so-called hold stop) In this case, the player keeps the state in which a maximum of about four balls enter the second entrance 640 in addition to the number of lotteries in which the player can recognize the jackpot determination.

  Also, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 when the number of reserves is the maximum, the lottery cannot be received, but the ball enters the adjustment channel 5911, so that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is reduced. More likely to decrease. The hold is digested by stopping the change and starting the next change, in other words, the longer the period until the stop of the change, the higher the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game decreases. Will be.

  Therefore, when the ball is left open in an effect with a high sense of expectation such as a long reach, it is possible to form a gaming property in which the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is reduced is increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during a high-reliability production such as a long reach, so that the player can concentrate on adjusting the firing power of the ball, eliminating the concentration power can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve a player's concentration on an effect such as a long reach, and it is possible to improve attention to the effect.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position has been described. However, the first variable winning device 6000 according to the sixth embodiment interferes with the balls by driving. Thus, the arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, below the first variable prize device 6000 in the present embodiment, the probability variation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is disposed, and the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 is placed in the specific area 4830. The state after the jackpot game is changed depending on whether or not the game passes.

  FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 along the line LII-LII in FIG. FIG. 52 shows the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (the main body member 1100, the covering member 1200, the open / close plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the like). In addition to including the rear cover 1700), an interference device 6900 newly introduced in the sixth embodiment is provided.

  The interference device 6900 is provided with a solenoid 6910 disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and having a movable slide axis disposed along a plane that is flat with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and a tip of the movable portion of the solenoid 6910. A main member 6920 is mainly provided with an interference member 6930 that is slid in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the front member 6920.

  The tip member 6920 includes a long hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The long hole 6921 is formed to be inclined in such a manner as to be closer to the thin plate member 1110 toward the distal end side of the distal end member 6920.

  The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by a through hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 arranged to face the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200, and the rear end portion is a long hole 6921. The rear end moves back and forth along the long hole 6921 with the driving of the solenoid 6910. By this back and forth operation, it is possible to enter the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

  The through hole H61 is provided at a position slightly separated to the left from the center of the third ball P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. When the interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 to be in a protruding state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), the ball P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  FIGS. 53A and 53B are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. FIG. Note that FIG. 53A illustrates a case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53B illustrates a case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. The sphere that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is shown by an imaginary line, and “V” is described in the sphere that first enters the specific region 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later. .

  As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 when the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, while the third ball is stored when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. Subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231, and the number of stored balls is less than 10 balls. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the specified number of the big hit games per round game R is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be ended due to the specified number of winnings, the end of the round game R is waited until the specified time. The effect that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, a quarter With a probability of 1, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends ten times, and the special symbol lottery is performed ten times. When the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 after the game is over, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, the game is normally performed until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be in the time saving state of the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, two types of special symbols such as “big hit I” and “big hit j” are provided. Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000, The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state).

  More specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). . When the big hit I is reached, the big hit game of two rounds is executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of approximately 285 prize balls and cannot almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is selected by lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), a jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

  In the case of the jackpot j, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state).

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn by a lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the second entrance 640), the right to shift the special symbol to a probable state (high probability state) is almost surely acquired. This is advantageous to the player as compared with a case where a big win is achieved in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64). Therefore, in order to obtain a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), in the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player performs a right-handed game. Do.

  During the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol decreases (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the normal symbol hit increases (1). Second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is hit, the jackpot j is almost completely shifted to the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state). It is easy for the player to easily acquire a large amount of prize balls because the special symbol that becomes the jackpot that can acquire the right) is easily repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is a first specific winning in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  In FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operation time TL). Is done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the length of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the length of each time is performed based on the time relationship described below.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the thirteenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). Then, the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The drive of the solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, and the distributing operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the protruding state by the long-term operation time TL, and after the lapse of the long-term operation time TL, the solenoid 6910 is driven to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again. By controlling, the interference member 6930 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53 (b)). In the present embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the interference member 6930 is first waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is reached. Is in a retracted state, so that it is practically impossible to win a specified number of balls, and the first round of the round game R ends when the first operation time T1 elapses.

  Simultaneously with the end of the first round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retreat state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot pass through to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to maintain the retraction state, respectively, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the fourteenth operation pattern>
In the case of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). Then, the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The drive of the solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, and the distributing operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the protruding state for a very short time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the very short time, the interference member 6930 is again held in the retracted state. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state most of the time, so as shown in FIG. Balls can be awarded. Therefore, while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the opening / closing member 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability variation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to maintain the retraction state, respectively, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time at which it is expected that the winning number of balls will be 3 or more and less than 6 in the first round of the round game R. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball blocks the line of sight of the player, and it is difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to check the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

  Therefore, the change due to the overhang of the interference member 6930 is limited to the third and subsequent balls moving only slightly in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the player recognizes whether or not the change by the interference member 6930 has occurred. It is possible to make the player enjoy the game of making the first specific winning opening 1000a win a ball and storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 without giving a sense of incongruity to the player by the operation of the interference member 6930. Can be.

  Then, the balls are stored near the entrance of the storage channel 1231, and yet the first round of the round game R is not completed, giving a sense of incongruity for the first time, and causing the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to be actually counted. For the first time, it is possible to form a new game characteristic of recognizing a difference in a jackpot type.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation (change in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, and the player can be operated by the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify a change in the situation of the game board 13 from the given discomfort in an easily recognizable manner, and to make the player recognize the difference in the jackpot type. Therefore, attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment is different from the third embodiment. The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured such that the ball disposed at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of the 1st variable winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to the line. The configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment except for the covering front plate 7200, and thus the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same configuration as the configuration described in the third embodiment (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the accommodation portion 1230, the detection sensor 1240, and the drop delay plate 3250). In addition to the above, a second drop delay plate 7260 newly provided in the present embodiment is provided.

  The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member extending between the terminal surface 3251b and the accommodation portion 1230 and extending to the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and descends as the upper surface 7261 separates from the detection sensor 1240. Incline. As shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 extends rearward so as not to interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the second drop delay plate 7260 has a distance between the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 near the detection sensor 1240 less than the diameter of the sphere and a position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) with respect to the movement trajectory of the sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the ball rolling the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second drop delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member that changes whether or not it comes into contact with the ball according to the path of the ball. This will be described below.

  FIGS. 58A and 58B are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35B. FIG. 58 (a) illustrates a case where the open / close plate 1300 changes to a closed state in a state where the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, and FIG. 58 (b) illustrates a case where the open / close plate 1300 is closed. The case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 in the meantime is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the ball is placed on the front plate in accordance with the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 generated during the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it comes into contact with the second drop delay plate 7260 in the process of falling, flows down to the drop delay plate 3250 side along the slope of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 to fall again to the drop position Pf3. To reach.

  Since the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (the distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball, the force of the ball Is large, it is possible to prevent the ball from vertically falling on the back side of the second drop delay plate 7260.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the sphere rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 moves along the rearward slope of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250 toward the main body member 3100. It flows down while contacting with.

  At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the ball is disposed below the second drop delay plate 7260, the length of the second drop delay plate 7260 extended to the back side is determined by the movement trajectory of the ball. The ball falling from above can be received by the upper surface 7261 while also being held on the front side.

  The sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and falls directly after reaching the fall position Pf3. Therefore, similarly to the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250 without delay.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the ball receives the action of the second drop delay plate 7260 and the case where the ball does not receive the ball, depending on from where the ball approaches the second drop delay plate 7260.

  In the present embodiment, while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the ball rolling the drop delay plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, the two balls are continuously rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 1300, and the previous ball is rolled. Even if the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by passing through the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the fall of the ball disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

  In addition, even if two balls are not connected in a row, the ball that rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 1300 happens to be closed when the ball is accidentally placed in front of the detection sensor 1240. Also, the ball can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the sphere rolls leftward on the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260, and then resumes rightward rolling along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, the ball can be maintained substantially in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 for a time longer than the time when the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 1300 is rolled. Thus, the number of useless balls (balls flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and discharged from the first out port 66) that can occur during the interval time can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member that opens and closes the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You may do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged without strictly controlling the operation length of the second discharge port regulating member. Therefore, the number of discharged balls can be changed between the case where the balls are discharged from the first discharge port and the case where the balls are discharged from the second discharge port. In this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be simultaneously opened, the time required for discharging the ball as a whole can be reduced, and the interval can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 that moves up and down can guide the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the upper position, and can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the lower position. May be deviated. In this case, when the ball is raised, it is not necessary to arrange the ball at a position sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200, so that the ball can be lifted more smoothly.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged from the single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional outlet may be arranged at a position midway in the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed depending on whether to discharge from the discharge port 1710 or to discharge from the additional discharge port. That is, it is difficult to discharge the ball clogged on the discharge port 1710 side from the additional discharge port. In addition, by discharging both of the discharge ports at the same time, the discharge efficiency of the ball can be increased, and the interval can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability variation determination unit 4800 starts operation based on the operation timing of the open / close plate 1300 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the sphere according to the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be acquired depending on the number of ejected balls regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly deviated has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation may be started at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resistance of the ball entering the ball changes depending on whether there is a gap in which the ball enters the storage channel 1231 (whether the storage channel 1231 is in the full state), It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that a predetermined sphere entering the storage channel 1231 is decelerated depending on whether or not the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is nearly full. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of round games R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, winning more than the specified number can be suppressed. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being prolonged while suppressing winnings of a specified number or more, as compared to the case where the ball is decelerated regardless of the stored number. In addition, not only deceleration but also acceleration may be performed. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than a predetermined number of winnings.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 so that the stored ball restricts the ball from entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electrically driven member may be provided that operates by a predetermined amount when a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes and that facilitates regulating the ball from entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the interval between rounds can be reduced as compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged at one time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the specified number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specified number of +1 balls may be stored. In this case, the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a exceeding the specified number can be limited to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, for each round, the round in which the eleventh ball easily passes and the round in which the eleventh ball is restricted from passing may be switched.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening and closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held (falls) at a position in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that two balls are not won simultaneously. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one ball may be held, so that the ball may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a until the open / close plate 1300 is closed. Alternatively, the possibility of this possibility may be switched for each round.

  In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage channel, and the storage channel may be a channel that branches off toward the outlet on the way. In this case, a predetermined number of spheres can be left in the storage channel 1231 regardless of which outlet the sphere is discharged from.

  In the second embodiment described above, the case where the number of storable balls when entering the ball from the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game, It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a is less than the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when the ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255a. May be equal to or more than the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure a gaming property in which, when the ball is ejected from the first specific winning opening 1000a while the ball is ejected every time at the interval between rounds, the round time is necessarily extended.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the ball that has flowed below the opening / closing plate 1300 is lifted again above the opening / closing plate 1300 by the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be lifted by a movable member having a constant operation capable of picking up the ball. In this case, the player can be entertained by the movement of the ball.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (the drop delay plate 3250) is provided below the open / close plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib projecting from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be provided above the opening / closing plate 1300. When the sliding plate 1300 is in the open state, the ball may not contact the rib, and when in the closed state, the ball may contact the rib. Thus, even above the opening and closing plate 1300, the flow speed of the ball can be changed to delay the flow.

  As a method of preventing the ball from abutting on the rib, the ball may be moved to the front or rear by tilting in the front-rear direction, and the rib may be provided on the opposite side.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the falling of the ball is delayed by the drop delay plate 3250 arranged on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be constituted by a flow path curved through the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that once passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player by the opening and closing plate 1300 is discharged again from the exit. Can be performed by the falling of the ball, and the area for delaying the ball is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. Therefore, even when the interval is long, the ball is delayed until the next round is started. A sufficient section can be secured.

  Note that the entrance is preferably below the opening and closing plate 1300, and the exit is preferably above the opening and closing plate 1300. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the opening of the entrance is narrowed by a part of the opening / closing plate 1300 to such an extent that the passage of a ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening and closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side has been described. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be configured to become gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the flowing direction of the sphere becomes small, and the sphere can be decelerated.

  The change in acceleration / deceleration may be reversed. In the case where the ball accelerates toward the downstream, it is possible to prevent the formation of an open ball on the drop delay plate 3250.

  In the third embodiment, the case where only the ball that has passed below the opening and closing plate 1300 abuts on the opening and closing plate 1300 by arranging the drop delay plate 3250 below the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, in a mode in which a ball slides in a pocket where a winning opening is arranged in an open state and a ball rolls on an upper surface of the open / close plate in a closed state, the rolling ball is opened and closed by a front and rear slide type opening and closing plate. A rib that can contact when reaching the downstream side on the plate may be arranged. A ball that directly enters the pocket does not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the open / close plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the ball from moving up and down with the operation of the open / close plate.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the formation of the fall delay plate 3250 at the fall position Pf3 is omitted and the ball falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the drop delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, and a through-hole through which the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 to the right is formed, and the ball is discharged from the through-hole. You may make it. In this case, even when the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be disposed above the open / close plate 1300.

  This is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the sphere that has fallen at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and lands on the fall delay plate 3250 remains rightward (detection sensor). The ball that has fallen to the second fall delay plate 7260 by the same fall, once falls to the left (to the side away from the detection sensor 1240), and then falls again to the fall delay plate 3250. To reach. That is, the period in which the flow of the sphere is delayed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the path along which the sphere flows are different.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, a case is described in which the flow paths in which the balls flowing from the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning ports 1000a and 2255a flow down to the storage channel 1231 and the number of entered balls is related. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sphere may be automatically supplied to the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the high probability state, the case where the number of lotteries until the jackpot is obtained decreases as the profit obtained by the player decreases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the greater the number of lotteries up to the jackpot, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained by the jackpot obtained in a short time is small, and the profit obtained by the jackpot obtained in a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be made uniform.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 to change the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operation member that operates in the storage channel 1231 in accordance with the stored number and changes the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 may be provided. In this case, regardless of the drive timing of the drive device 1500, the operation members move according to the stored number, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the operation timing of the operation members is different from normal.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion (particularly, a U-shaped portion) forming the storage channel 1231 moves in the extending direction (left-right direction) of the channel to change the length of the storage channel 1231. May be. In this case, even if the player has moved in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice whether or not the player has moved because of the small movement amount. Therefore, it is possible to form a playability in which the player notices the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) only after the ball is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable prize device 6000 can be increased. Can be improved.

  The movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the switching of the movement may or may not be performed by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 projects in a state where a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an overhang state may be formed before the ball starts to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be seven. In addition, a pattern that forms a protruding state after the ball is stored and a pattern that forms a protruding state before the ball starts entering the storage channel 1231 may be mixed in each round. In this case, a single member can be used to switch between a round in which the storage number is seven and a round in which the storage number is nine.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be changed to a protruding state while the sphere is being discharged from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing at which the ball is ejected and the timing at which the interference member 6930 is brought into the extended state, the ejection mode of the ball can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points not to win more than the target number>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. And a ball entry preventing unit that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the entrance when a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a predetermined period by the detection unit. Machine A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly and vigorously on the operating member, an extra ball is required between the start of the operation of the operating member and the drop of the ball from the operating member. However, there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of balls may pass through the detection port because there is a possibility of passing through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means can make it difficult for the predetermined number or more balls to pass through the detection means. Therefore, irrespective of the magnitude of the momentum of the ball in the state arranged on the upstream side of the entrance, the ease of passage of the ball when passing through the entrance is determined by comparing a predetermined number of balls with a predetermined number of balls. It can be changed with subsequent spheres. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port.

  In addition, as the ball entry preventing means, means for changing the ease of passage of the ball in accordance with the detection result of the detecting means, means for constantly maintaining the ease of passage of the ball in the ball entrance, etc. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the ball entry preventing means includes: a container for accommodating the ball passing through the ball entrance; an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits the container; A first state in which the ball can pass therethrough, and a discharge switching unit that is switched in a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, wherein the storage unit is provided between the entrance port and the discharge port. A game machine A2 characterized by being formed with a volume that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, the accommodation means is formed with a capacity for accommodating a maximum of a predetermined number of balls between the entrance port and the exit port. When the balls are stored in the storage means while the means are maintained in the second state, the balls stored in the storage means can prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the predetermined number or more balls from passing through the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A2, the entering ball switching means is formed so as to be maintained in the second state while the discharge switching means is in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the accommodation means from the entrance while the ball is being ejected from the accommodation means. The operation timings of the discharge switching unit and the incoming ball switching unit may be simultaneous or different.

  The gaming machine A4, wherein the gaming machine A2 or A3 is provided with a driving unit which is also used as the discharge switching unit and the incoming ball switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the combined driving means. Thereby, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, after the incoming ball switching means starts changing the state from the second state to the first state, the discharge switching means moves from the first state to the first state. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that a state change is started in a state in which the state change is started toward two states, and the state changes are completed almost simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the accommodation means from being ejected from the ejection port after the entrance switching means is in the first state. While preventing (while preventing irregular winning), the ball switching device can be started to operate from the second state before the ball is discharged from the discharge port, so that the discharge from the discharge port is performed. As compared with the case where the operation of the ball-input switching means is started after the completion of the game, the number of balls flowing through the game area and passing through the ball-input switching means toward the out port can be reduced.

  The order of the state change may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching unit, or a dedicated driving unit may be provided for each switching unit to control the timing. May be.

  A gaming machine A6, wherein any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 includes a changing means for changing the maximum number of the housing means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodation units can be changed by the changing unit, so that the predetermined number is temporarily (for example, in a specific round). A state in which more balls than the number are accommodated in the accommodation means can be formed. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to reconfigure a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of numerical values are changed by using accommodating means having the same shape (it is possible to cope with a difference in specifications). As a result, development costs can be reduced as compared with the case where a shape is created for each specification.

  In the gaming machine A6, the entrance is connected to the first entrance and the storage means downstream of the first entrance, so that the ball flowing down the game area can pass therethrough. And a second entrance where the passage is switched by the entrance switching means, wherein a ball enters the accommodation means from the first entrance and the accommodation from the second entrance. In the case where the ball enters the means, the maximum number of accommodated means is changed, and the changing means selectively sets which of the entrances allows the ball to pass therethrough. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the ball entering from the first entrance and the ball entering from the second entrance can be stored together in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required space as compared with a case where separate storage units are provided respectively.

  In the gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interference means capable of projecting into the accommodation means, wherein the interference means interferes with a ball which is projected and stored inside the accommodation means, and A game machine A8 characterized in that the maximum accommodation number of accommodation means is changed depending on whether or not the accommodation means is evacuated to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the number of balls to be accommodated is changed by changing the volume inside the accommodation means without changing the path of the ball entering the accommodation means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the accommodation number without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the accommodation means, and is configured to be able to arrange a ball on the front side during evacuation. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of evacuation can be hidden by the ball arranged in front. This makes it possible to make the operation of the interference means inconspicuous while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Points to suppress unnecessary balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Delay means for delaying the flow of a ball at an upstream position of the entrance when the incoming ball switching means is in the second state, as compared with the case where the incoming ball switching means is in the first state; A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the out port, it is possible to strike the ball so that the ball does not fall from the operating member. There is a problem that a certain number of pitches actually occur depending on whether or not (the level of the technique of launching by the player).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the incoming ball switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing from the upstream position of the incoming port cannot be guided to the incoming port, the delay means operates. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to easily arrange the ball at an upstream position of the ball entrance until the ball switching device is switched to the first state. If the incoming ball switching means is in the first state while the ball is at a position upstream of the entrance, the ball is guided to the entrance. As a result, the effect of the player's launching technique on the actual pitch can be reduced, so that a beginner-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

  The mode of the delay unit is not limited. For example, it may be a drop restricting means composed of a horizontally long member for supporting the ball from below and restricting the ball from falling down to the end, or a projecting means formed of a projection for decelerating the ball by contact.

  In the gaming machine B1, the delay means increases the degree of delay in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side as compared with a case where the ball is arranged on the upstream side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases in a state where the ball is arranged downstream of the delay means, so that the attention of the ball flowing down along the delay means is increased. Can be improved.

  Note that the degree of the delay is not limited at all. For example, the velocity of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the incoming ball switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that a ball arranged on a downstream side has a shape in which an interval between the ball and the opening direction of the entrance is larger than a ball arranged on an upstream side. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in the downstream side of the delay means in such a manner that the distance between the opening direction of the entrance opening and the ball increases. Is formed, it is possible to suppress direct entry into the entrance to the ball when the ball vigorously flows down the delay means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the incoming ball switching means includes an ascent means for elevating a game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means comprises: A gaming machine B4, which is disposed below the lifting means in a state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is disposed below the ascending means in the first state, so that the ball can be moved from the incoming ball switching means. The ball can be delayed after being visually recognized by the player as if it had fallen. As a result, attention to the ball can be improved.

  The gaming machine B5, further comprising a climbing restricting means which is disposed on the upstream side of the ball flow path from the lifting means and regulates the upward movement of the ball and guides the ball in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is restricted by the upward restricting means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

  The gaming machine B6, wherein the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascent control means is provided with a rescue entrance for giving a predetermined benefit to the player.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, as a benefit different from the benefit generated when the ball passes through the entrance opening due to the ball that has been given a load when the ascent means is lifted and flew off. In addition, it is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the rescue entrance. Thus, even if the ball deviates from the downflow path to the entrance, it is possible to prevent the attention from being reduced, and the movement of the ball can enhance the interest of the player.

  The gaming machine B7 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, wherein the delay means includes a variable action portion having a different effect on a ball depending on a mode of arrival at the delay means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be made different depending on the mode of arrival at the delay means. As a result, it is possible to select different spheres to give different effects.

  It should be noted that the difference between the modes of arrival is not limited. For example, a difference in the arrival position of the ball with reference to the entrance port or a difference in the flowing direction of the ball before reaching the delay means may be used.

  In the gaming machine B7, the variable action section delays the flow of the ball reaching the delay means at a position separated from the entrance by a predetermined distance or less, while separating from the entrance by a predetermined distance or more. The gaming machine B8, wherein the gaming machine B8 does not act on a ball that has reached the delay means at a position.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B7, for a ball that is close to the entrance and cannot switch the state of the entrance switching means in time, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action section. On the other hand, an appropriate game speed can be maintained by not allowing the variable action portion to act on a ball that is far from the ball entrance and is sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball switching device.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game launch>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A ball that can pass through the entrance in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance during a period in which the first state was formed before the entrance switching means maintains the first state; A gaming machine C1 comprising number changing means capable of changing the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, by the number changing means, the number of balls passing through the entrance hole in the state where the incoming ball switching means forms the first state, and before that, the incoming ball switching means uses the In the case where the first state is formed, it can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance, so that in a series of operation patterns in which the incoming ball switching means repeatedly forms the first state, the profit given to the player can be reduced. Adjustments can be made.

  The method of adjusting the profit is not limited. For example, due to having passed through a large number of balls through the ball entrance when the ball switching device previously formed the first state, the ball was then entered when the ball switching device formed the first state. The mode in which the number of balls that can enter the mouth may be suppressed may be used, or when the incoming ball switching unit next forms the first state due to a similar event, the profit of the player (not limited to outgoing balls, For example, the right to shift to the high probability state may be obtained).

  In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes: accommodation means for accommodating the balls passing through the entrance; an exit through which the balls pass when the balls exit the accommodation means; Discharge switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes. A gaming machine C2 comprising: an operation mode switching unit that enables a change in the number of balls ejected from the storage unit depending on a difference in operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the number of the balls accommodated in the accommodating means discharged from the outlet can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the balls remain in the accommodating means. And the number of remaining spheres can be made variable. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres required until the accommodation means is filled with spheres, and to physically change the maximum number of spheres passing through the entrance.

  The difference between the operation modes is not limited at all. For example, the operation periods may be different, or when a plurality of outlets are arranged, the discharge switching unit provided in which outlet is operated (operating target) may be different.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining an interval of discharging balls from the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, since the interval of discharging the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, regardless of the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means, The number of discharge balls from the discharge port can be defined according to the length of the period in which the switching unit is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls to be discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

  The mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load that the ball immediately before the discharge port receives from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or the flow path may be formed from the inner wall of the storage means. A rib that is protruded and applies a load to the sphere to decelerate the sphere may be used as the means.

  In the gaming machine C3, the gap maintaining means includes a protrusion protruding from an inner surface of the housing means in a flow path of the ball near the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, since the protruding portion is protruded into the downflow path, the downflowing ball is brought into contact with the protruding portion to decelerate, so that the ball having a short distance from the discharge port. And the falling speed of the sphere with a short distance from the discharge port can be prevented from changing greatly, and the falling speed of the sphere can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine C4, the accommodating means includes a discharge path for causing the ball to flow continuously in a predetermined flowing direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protruding portion is staggered from an opposing surface constituting the discharge path. A game machine C5, which is projected at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the protruding portions are alternately protruded from the opposing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the protruding portions collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path, thereby causing the balls to collide. It is possible to cause the ball to collide with the protrusion at predetermined intervals while being displaced in the vertical direction in the predetermined flow-down direction, and the action of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long time.

  In the gaming machine C5, the accommodation means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and that rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the falling velocity of the ball is formed to be higher than the falling velocity of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flow down at a higher speed than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so that the balls stored in the storage means. Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) for discharging the balls from the outlet can be kept constant.

  The gaming machine C7 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, wherein the entrance includes an opening for judging a special symbol big hit by passing a ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of times of the special symbol big hit determination and the number of entering balls into the entrance can be associated. Thereby, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed according to the number of times of determination of the special symbol required until the big hit is obtained.

  The gaming machine C7 includes starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting port can enter the accommodation means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine C8.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices provided can be reduced.

  Incidentally, the outlet includes a first outlet and a second outlet arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first outlet and the second outlet independently of each other. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are provided to the storage means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the ball is discharged from the second discharge port (under the same conditions). It may be arranged at a position where the number of remaining balls can be changed.

  In this case, the number of the balls remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, so that the flow speed of the balls flowing down the storage means changes. Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the number of balls discharged from the storage means.

  The arrangement of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodation means and the other may be arranged at an intermediate position of the accommodation means, or both may be arranged at the lower end, and a branched flow path for distributing the sphere may be arranged upstream thereof. You may do it.

  Further, the operation mode of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited. For example, they may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are opened, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the storage means can be reduced as compared with the case where balls are discharged from a single discharge port. Thereby, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls ejected from the out mouth during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  By the way, the first discharge port may be disposed at a lower end of the storage means, and the second discharge port may be disposed upstream of the first discharge port.

  In this case, when discharging the ball from the second discharge port, regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is stored in the storage means. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means varies, it is possible to easily keep the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls constant. Further, even if the launch of the ball is reduced due to clogging of the ball or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage means.

  Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on a downstream side branched at a lower end portion of the storage means.

  In this case, from the state in which the same number of balls are accommodated in the accommodation means, it is possible to switch from which outlet the last ejected ball is ejected through the operation mode of the ejection switching means. From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the discharge mode of the ball. That is, for example, in a case where the profit given to the player changes depending on which discharge port discharges the ball that is discharged last, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow-down state of the ball.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Switching drive means for switching the incoming ball switching means to the second state in response to the predetermined number of balls passing through the entrance during the first state, and After the switching drive by the switching drive unit is started, an allowed state that allows the ball to pass to the entrance and a driven ball state switching unit that can form a regulated state that regulates the passage of the ball, A gaming machine D1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the after-drive ball-entry state switching means switches whether or not a ball can enter after the entrance has been closed by the switching drive means, an extra ball can enter. Timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine D1, the entrance includes a first entrance and a second entrance, and the post-drive entry state switching means forms the restricted state at the first entrance. The gaming machine D2, wherein the second entrance is formed in the allowable state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number depends on whether the ball passes through the first entrance and the ball passes through the second entrance. It is possible to switch whether or not the ball can be made to enter the ball, so that it is possible to improve the attention of which ball opening is opened by the ball switching device.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first entrance is provided with a drop hole in front of the opening, and when the entrance switching means starts switching to the second state, the first entrance is closer to the first entrance than in front of the opening. A gaming machine D3, wherein a ball disposed on the upstream side is also dropped into the drop hole.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains upstream of the first ball entrance, the ball is dropped into the hole while the ball switching device maintains the second state. And keep it away from the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a ball exceeding the specified number from passing through the first entrance.

<Points where balls join the storage channel from multiple winning ports>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A container for accommodating a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entrance, wherein the entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the first entrance Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 wherein the accommodation means is formed in such a manner that the balls passing through the second entrance are merged.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance merge in the accommodation means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. The number of balls that can pass through the second entrance hole can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts associated therewith) throughout the entire game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the accommodation means is empty, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the first entrance and the accommodation by passing through the second entrance. A gaming machine E2, wherein the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second entrance are different. The player's attention to whether or not the entrance to the ball is opened can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance is set smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls are discharged when each entrance is closed. The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance, and the first entrance is opened during the opening when the second entrance is opened a plurality of times. A gaming machine E3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, the ball that has passed through the second entrance before opening the first entrance and the second entrance after opening the first entrance. The passed ball can make a substantial difference to the player.

  That is, if the ball passes through the second entrance before opening the first entrance, even if more balls than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, the ball is exceeded. No ball is ejected, and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated from the first entrance, so that the second entrance has the same number as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance. The player will only get the same profit as passing through the number of.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, and if more balls than can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, they are deducted. The player can get additional benefits.

<Points where the interference member overhangs>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. An interfering means which is disposed in a flow path of a ball passing through the entrance and is switchable between a protruding state in which the ball can interfere and a retracted state in which the ball does not interfere. Gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the interference means is disposed on the flow path of the ball passing through the entrance, the interference means is maintained in the extended state, so that the distance from the entrance to the interference means is maintained. Ball can be blocked in the path, and further balls can be prevented from passing through the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the prize ball throughout the jackpot game by the operation mode of the interference means.

  A gaming machine F2 comprising a stopping means for stopping a ball in front of the interference means in the retreat state of the interference means in the gaming machine F1.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhang state in a state where the ball is parked in front of the interference means. , The movement can be hidden by the sphere. Therefore, the operation can be made hard to be noticed by the player.

  In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the state of the interference means can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of the state change state of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means, so while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state, The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize is possible based on the attacker's actions>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. And a profit switching means that can be switched in the game machine. In the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, when a ball can pass through the profit provision means, It is possible to switch between the case where the ball cannot pass through the application means. Game machine G1, wherein.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, when the ball can pass through the profit provision means, and when the ball passes through the profit provision means. Since it is possible to switch between cases where it is not possible, it does not obstruct the entry of the ball into the entrance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the entrance.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a stopping means disposed upstream of the profit switching means and switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed. The stopping means is switched from the stopped state to the passing state as the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the ball flowing downstream of the stopping means is switched to the profit switching. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the ball passing through the entrance is once stopped by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball gains at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent reaching to the switching means. Thus, no matter how the ball passes through the entrance while the entry switching device is in the first state, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching device at unexpected timing. it can.

  The gaming machine G2 further includes a period changing unit that changes a period during which the ball that passes through the stopping unit and reaches the profit switching unit after switching the stopping unit to the passing state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period in which the ball can pass through the stopping means and reach the profit switching means changes due to the period changing means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the playability of the game, and to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

  Incidentally, the period changing means may be means for changing the flowing speed of the ball passing through the stopping means, or means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state to when the ball starts to flow, Means for changing the number of balls stopped at the stopping means may be used.

  The gaming machine G4, wherein in the gaming machine G3, the period changing means is formed so as to be able to switch the number of balls stopped by the stopping means in accordance with a profit given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted based on the number of balls parked in the stopping means, so that attention is paid to the balls parked in the stopping means. Strength can be improved.

  The means for switching the number of balls parked in the parking means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means can be changed by a combination of a period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and a period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

  That is, for example, when the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened, and then immediately after that, the period during which the entrance switching means is set to the first state is extremely shortened, However, since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream of the stopping means is extremely small, even if a new ball does not enter from the entrance, a large number of balls are stopped at the stopping means.

  On the other hand, if the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state is sufficiently long, and then immediately after that, the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state is extremely short, of the balls that have been parked in the stopping means, In addition to the fact that most of the balls flow downstream of the stopping means and that no new balls enter the entrance, almost no balls remain in the stopping means.

  In this way, by changing the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and immediately after that, shortening the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state, the ball is stopped in the stopping means regardless of the launch mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the entering ball switching means includes a plurality of types of closing maintaining periods that are maintained in the second state, and the setting unit selects and sets the closing maintaining periods, and a predetermined period from an end point of the closing maintaining periods. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a lapse.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, since the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods in which the entering ball switching means maintains the second state, the ball is stopped. Is formed from a plurality of types until the profit switching means is switched to the first state after passing through, even if the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is the same, It is possible to control to be able to form when passing and when not passing. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the power of attention for the downward flow of the ball.

  Note that, for example, a period in which the entrance ball switching unit is maintained in the first state for a period long enough to allow a specified number of balls to pass through the entrance, and immediately after that, a period in which the entrance ball switching unit is maintained in the second state. When the setting unit selects the closed maintenance period in an extremely short manner (the ball passing through the stopping unit is shorter than the ball reaching the profit switching unit), the entering ball switching unit enters the first state immediately thereafter. By changing the state of the profit switching means from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set a period from when the stopping means enters the passing state to when the profit switching means enters the first state. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed the stopping means passes through the profit provision means. Thereby, regardless of the number of balls arresting on the arresting means and the mode of the arrest (for example, timing), it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the sphere that has passed the arresting means passes through the profit provision means.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the entrance switching means is performed not by the first operation caused by a specified number of balls entering the entrance, but by a second operation caused by the passage of a specified time. A gaming machine G6 including an intentional selecting means for intentionally selecting the game machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, by the action of the intentional selecting means, the switching operation of the incoming ball switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time, It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching depending on the passage manner of the ball at the entrance. Thereby, while the profit switching means is in the first state, it is possible to secure a long time during which the ball is not allowed to enter the ball.

  The intentional selecting means is exemplified by a state in which the ball does not pass through the entrance due to the passage of less than the specified number of balls. This can be realized by intentionally clogging (making the ball not passing) the ball in the middle of passing through the entrance.

<Point 2 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize is possible based on the attacker's operation, there is a fool>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched in the game machine, wherein the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by the operation mode of the incoming ball switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching unit can be changed by the operation mode of the ball switching unit while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the ball is reached by the profit switching means.

  The gaming machine H2, wherein the number of balls related to the time when the entering ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means in the gaming machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the player can determine how the ball is guided to the profit switching means based on the length of the incoming ball switching means maintained in the second state. , It is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the entering ball switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a start state in which a ball is started to be sent to the profit switching means is formed while the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means only after the start state, the operation of the ball entry switching means is stopped immediately before the start state, Since it is possible to return to the first state, it is possible to form a playability in which throwing the ball to the profit switching means is not necessarily started just by starting the operation from the first state. As a result, it is necessary to directly check whether the ball reaches the profit switching means, so that the attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Gaming machine Z1. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 110 main controller (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selecting means)
640 Second entrance (part of entrance, starting port)
640a Electric accessory (part of entry switching means)
1000a First specific winning opening (part of the entrance, first entrance)
1140 Projection (part of interval maintaining means, projection)
1150 Discharge port (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means)
1231 Storage channel (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, part of ball entry state switching means after driving, storage means, discharge path)
1231a Guide surface (part of interval maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of interval maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Projecting part (part of interval maintaining means, projecting part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening / closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
1310 Plate part (lifting means)
1331 Ball entry prevention part (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 regulating member (part of ball entry preventing means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, stopping means)
2251 Second storage channel (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-drive ball entry state switching means, storage means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd specific winning opening (part of the entrance, 2nd entrance)
2840 slide plate (part of ball entry switching means)
3181 additional winning opening (relief entrance)
3182 Curved extension plate (lift control means)
3250 Drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b Terminal surface (part of falling hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit provision means)
4850 distribution device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit provision means)
5900 Ball adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Here, in the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, there is a gaming machine profits more awarded to the player to only swing amount of the game ball is changed (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-155538 A

However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to gaming balls .

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of satisfactorily improving the attention to a game ball.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, a game area where the game ball is flowing down, the game ball ball entrance area passable flowing down the game area, the upstream side of the ball entrance area ball entrance switch that is switched game ball to move upstream of the first state capable guide the moving game balls into the entering sphere region side and the entering-sphere area with a second state non guided to the entering sphere region side means a detectable detection means ball entrance to the entering ball regions, and benefits applying means for applying a predetermined benefit to the player based on the game ball that has passed through the entering-sphere area passes, the benefit a third state capable guide the game balls in providing means, and a grant switching means is switched to the fourth state incapable guide the game ball to the benefit imparting means, winning balls based on detection by said detecting means a gaming machine payout of Ru is executed, entering-sphere area A space formation unit that forms a predetermined space in which a predetermined number of game balls that have passed can exist at the same time; the entry area includes at least a first entry area and a second entry area; Comprises first detection means capable of detecting a ball entering the first ball entry area, and second detection means capable of detecting a ball entry into the second ball entry area, and dispensing the prize ball Is executed both when detected by the first detecting means and when detected by the second detecting means, and the space forming means comprises a game ball having passed through the first entering ball area or the second entering ball area. Are formed in such a manner as to merge , and when the operation mode of the incoming ball switching means is different, the mode in which the game ball reaches the provision switching means may be different .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the attention to the gaming ball.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8. It is a front view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning device in the XII-XII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device in XII-XII line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 19 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 18. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of the first variable winning device, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXIb-XXIb in FIG. 21 (a), and (c) is a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of a variable prize-winning device, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable prize-winning device in XXId-XXId line of Drawing 21 (c). FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter and a big hit type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the first operation pattern, and (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the second operation pattern. FIG. 9C is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 25. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. 27 (c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening and a 2nd specific winning opening in a 4th operation pattern, and (b) is a 1st specific winning opening and a 2nd specific winning opening in a 5th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning openings. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31. It is a rear perspective view of a covering front plate. (A) to (c) are sectional views of the first variable prize-winning device taken along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the flow-down aspect of the ball which reached the 1st variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of a game board in a 4th embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of a 1st specific winning opening and a specific area | region in a 6th operation | movement pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the time measurement of a 1st specific winning opening and a specific area | region in a 7th operating pattern. It is a figure showing a change. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 8th operation pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the time measurement of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in a 9th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific field in the 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of a game board in a 5th embodiment. It is a partial back view of a game board. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus in XLVI-XLVI line of FIG. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (A) and (b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the big hit type in a special symbol. (A) is a figure which shows the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd specific winning opening in the 11th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specific winning opening and the 2nd operation pattern in the 12th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning openings. It is a partial front view of a game board in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along the line LII-LII in FIG. 51. (A) and (b) are front views of the first variable winning device. (A) is a figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 13th operation pattern, (b) is a figure which shows the timekeeping of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area | region in the 14th operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change. It is a back perspective view of a covering front board in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of a 1st variable winning device. FIG. 36 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to a line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b).

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape having an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning hole 63. The entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 1000, the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the periphery thereof is formed by the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin-made arc member 70 connecting the rails on the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed in response to a prize winning at the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When passing, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot, and it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as a probable change state of the special symbol), For example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the lottery of the special symbol performed for the ball entering the first entrance 64 is referred to as “the lottery of the special symbol 1”, and the lottery is performed for the entrance to the second entrance 640. The special symbol lottery to be performed is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  It should be noted that as the jackpot types of the special symbols, there are provided six types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot a”, “jackpot b”, and “jackpot c” (FIG. 22). reference). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 1000 is changed.

  When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) elapses, the lottery result is displayed. Is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is determined for each type of entrance. Each of them is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of retained balls for the second entrance 640 (special) If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the drawing is started. When both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol), it is determined whether or not the winning is the normal symbol. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and a ball enters the second entrance 640. It will be in an easy state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Be started.

  In the present embodiment, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given from the end of the special game state to the end of 100 special symbol lotteries, and the special symbol lottery is performed. After the completion of 100 times, the normal state is set.

  In the present embodiment, when the special symbol change state is given after the special game state ends, the special symbol change state is configured to end according to the number of special symbol lotteries. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a described later), the pachinko machine 10 May shift to a high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed). In this case, after a jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c, which will be described later), a normal symbol time reduction state is set until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  In addition, the number of lotteries of the special symbol to which the above-mentioned special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

  Further, the number of lotteries of the special symbol which is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol described above is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, when the so-called probability is being changed (probable change), in other words, to the special game state. It is a state of the game that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol (while the special symbol is being changed) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a state in which the special symbol is not being changed, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the special symbol being changed.

  The normal symbol time reduction state (medium time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and a ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. In addition, the normal state refers to a state of the game in which the special symbol is not probable and the normal symbol is not shortened (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) hit probability increases).

  During a special symbol change or a normal symbol during working hours, not only does the probability of hitting the normal symbol increase, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened is changed. A longer time is set as compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state), a ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (closed state). It is easy to do. Therefore, the ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640 while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is being shortened. That is, the lottery of the special symbol is easily performed.

  It is to be noted that, while the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time. Alternatively, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when a normal symbol is hit may be configured to be greater than in the normal state. In addition, during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the ordinary symbol ( Only the winning probability of the second symbol) may be increased as compared to the normal state.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, at the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate in a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, is being executed. In this case, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is displayed in a lighting state as a stop symbol after the variation is completed, or a ball inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry of the ball is performed. The number of balls is retained up to a maximum of four times for each type of entrance, and the number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of a special symbol) Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, Special symbols (first symbols) according to the jackpot a, the jackpot b, and the jackpot c) are shown.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 to change the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing a variable display, and a variable symbol display of a second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball at a normal entrance (through gate) 67. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. A center frame 86 is provided on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the fluctuating display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed. It is configured such that a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not prepared is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", or "big hit c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added. A fluctuation display in which the main symbols are aligned is performed. On the other hand, if it is "big hit A" or "big hit a", any of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including the odd number is also included. The variable display in which the main symbols to which are added is aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a description will be given of a display (right-hand navigation) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and prompts the user to launch a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is in a certain state or the normal symbol is reduced in time, so that the ball is shifted to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting the ball (right-handed), the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. As will be described in detail later, when a special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 2) is performed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the first entrance 64 As compared with the case where a special symbol is drawn based on the ball having entered the ball (a special symbol 1 lottery), a jackpot (a jackpot a) in which the maximum profit can be obtained is more likely. Therefore, in the certain state of the special symbol given after the end of the big hit, or in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the right-handed execution is advantageous to the player. In other words, even if the special symbol is set to the positive change state or the normal symbol time saving state, the ball cannot enter the second entrance 640 unless the player hits right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the symbol's probable change state or the normal symbol's time reduction state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a special symbol is in a probable change state or in a normal symbol time reduction state, a specific image (right-handed navigator) is displayed so that the player can change the special symbol in a probable state or a normal symbol time reduction state. It is configured to ensure that the benefits of

  In the right-hand navigation, the character "Aim for the right!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely obtain the benefits of being in the specially changed state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined that the player is performing right-handing even though it is not during the period in which the player should launch (right-hand) the ball on the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. This is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case where the image is displayed. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not in a stable state or a normal symbol is not saved in time).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily opened in the normal state (even if the player hits right, it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, when the player hits the ball in the normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the player hits the ball at the first entrance 64 by hitting the ball left. That is, if the player makes a right-handed hit in the normal state, it is difficult for the player to hit the jackpot, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image to encourage left-handed, it is possible to prevent (suppress) loss of the player.

  When it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state, the characters "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!" Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. And characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that right-handing should not be performed (left-handing should be performed). Also, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing the irregular game method of right-handing in the normal state by checking the presence or absence of the right-hand warning screen.

  In addition, as a method of determining whether or not the ball is right-handed, for example, the ball enters the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) into which the ball can flow when right-handed. Judgment is made based on whether or not the ball is hit.

  In the present embodiment, a right strike warning image is displayed when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (entered) the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being played, and the right A hit warning image may be displayed. Thus, the clerk of the hall can easily determine whether there is any fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), when detecting that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a, a signal indicating that the illegality is being performed to the hall computer is provided. You may comprise so that it may output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that the illegal operation is performed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the illegal operation is performed.

  Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable prize device 1000 is, for example, a case where a ball is detected in the first specific prize port 1000a even though it is not in the special game state (big hit state).

  When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable prize device 1000, a large character "Warning" is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, a character "Please call a gate error attendant" is displayed at the bottom. From these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and can promptly request a clerk in the hall for repair or the like.

  Each time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)). Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is moved. It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter during a certain symbol change or during a normal symbol time reduction in the game state than in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol change, and during the normal symbol time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, the chance of hitting the normal symbol increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during a certain change of the special symbol and during a time reduction of the normal symbol, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during the certain change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than that during the normal state during the special change of the special symbol or during the time reduction of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per one normal symbol contact may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, the ball flowing down the right side of the game board. Are configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The processing may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. Also, the number of assembled normal entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the mounting position of the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reserved lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on when the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in a front view, a second entrance 640 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main entrance switch is turned on by the second entrance switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first entrance 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 are different from each other, for example, the first entry. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins the ball opening 64 may be set to three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second inlet port 640 may be set to five.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and usually, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, The object 640a is in an open state (expanded state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher during a special symbol change and during a normal symbol time reduction, and the time required for the normal symbol change display is shorter than in the normal state. In the display, the symbol “○” is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is longer than in the normal state. Therefore, a state in which a ball can be more easily won in the second entrance 640 than in the normal state can be created during the special symbol change and during the normal symbol time reduction. On the other hand, the first entrance 64 does not have a motorized accessory as provided in the second entrance 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Here, the probability of a big hit in the case where a ball has won in the first entrance 64 and the case where a ball has won in the second entrance 640 is the same regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state. is there. However, the probability of the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) that provides the maximum profit (departure) as the jackpot type selected in the case of the jackpot is determined when the ball is won in the second entrance 640. Is set higher than when the ball has won the first entrance opening 64.

  In normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second entrance 640. The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hit”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim for

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is shortened, the ball is passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be opened. Since the ball is easy to win in the second entrance 640, the ball is fired toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right strike”). It is more advantageous for the player to aim at the big hit by the prize at the second entrance 640 while opening the electric accessory 640a by passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. Becomes

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment emits a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the pachinko machine is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Can be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to change the way of hitting the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (the lower left side of the second ball entrance 640), and the first specific opening that is opened in the left-right direction substantially at the center thereof. A winning port (large opening port) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery performed due to the winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning port 1000a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until ten balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated, for example, at most 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player. (15 balls based on winning of one ball).

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300 that forms an open state for guiding a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the opening / closing plate 1300. Have. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or is hardly won. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the open / close plate 1300 upward, thereby temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, and switching between the open state and the normal closed state. Is operated alternately.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 66 below the first entrance port 64. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the entrances 63, 64, 1000a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first exit 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes major processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. I do.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of an opening and closing plate of the first specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) composed of a solenoid with a large open port for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, and the like) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. I do.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. The first variable winning device 1000 has an inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface thereof, and enters the second entrance 640 of the balls flowing down the right side of the variable timepiece unit 80 when the player makes a right hit. Almost all of the spheres that have flowed downstream from the sphere are guided to the flow path forming part.

  FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a main body member 1100 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a covered front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the main body member 1100 from the front side, and the main body member 1100 and the covered front plate. An opening / closing plate 1300 pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the power transmitting member 1200 and a power transmission member 1400 rotatably supported on the rear side of the main body member 1100 and applying a load to the opening / closing plate 1300 by rotation; A driving device 1500 that drives the driving device 1400, a regulating member 1600 that regulates the discharge of the sphere in conjunction with the opening and closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, and a regulating member 1600 that cover the main body member 1100 from the rear side. And a rear cover 1700 that is fastened and fixed as described above.

  The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 which is recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front to the back side. A housing part 1120 that is housed and formed partially through, a holding hole 1130 that is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted on the right side of the housing part 1120 when viewed from the front, and a ball flows down on the front side of the thin plate member 1110 A projecting portion 1140 projecting along the path, an outlet 1150 for ejecting a sphere from the front to the rear of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation projecting to the rear side of the thin plate member 1110 and supporting the power transmission member 1400; Mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 protruding in a claw shape so as to be able to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 above the discharge port 1150. Provided.

  The housing portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed, a rectangular recess 1122 provided in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and A through-hole formed in a rectangular shape having a posture perpendicular to a straight line connecting a pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening / closing plate 1300 operating along the right end of the recess 1122 forward and backward of the thin plate member 1110. 1123 mainly.

  The support recess 1121 is formed to be slightly larger in width than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the covering front plate 1200. You. That is, the opening / closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the covering front plate 1200.

  The rectangular concave portion 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and the depth of the concave portion is slightly deeper than the plate portion 1310. Accordingly, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is inclined (closed state), the plate portion 1310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular concave portion 1122, and the opening / closing plate 1300 can be prevented from protruding from the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

  The protruding portion 1140 is protruded to a position where the protruding portion 1140 comes into contact with a sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200. The falling ball is decelerated by contacting the protruding portion 1140. Note that a similar protruding portion 1235 is also provided in the storage channel 1231 of the covering front plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap the protruding portion 1140 when viewed in the front-rear direction.

  The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a uniform protrusion height on the rear side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in the shape of a rib.

  The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotation tip 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip portion 1421.

  The covering front plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 to the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 in front view to the rear side. 1220, a housing portion 1230 extending in a box shape opened to the back side toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220 in the left-right direction, and provided at the upper end of the housing portion 1230. And a detection sensor 1240.

  The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220 when viewed from the front, the left side wall portion of the housing portion 1230 when viewed from the front, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow passage as a hole through which a ball flows down in the vertical direction. Unit is configured.

  The storage portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape in a front view, and has a storage channel 1231 formed with a width that allows a sphere to flow down inside, and protrudes rearward at a middle portion of the storage channel 1231. It mainly includes a projecting portion 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side in front view.

  The storage channel 1231 is configured such that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross section that opens to the back side is extended while being bent in a front U-shape, and the opening is closed by the main body member 1100 so that a sphere passes therethrough. To form a flow path. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the area where the storage channel 1231 is formed is formed of a light-transmitting material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the storage channel 1231.

  The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12) which is an inclined surface that guides the ball toward the rear side at the lowermost end, and rolling that rolls the ball guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-rear direction. Surface 1231b.

  The angle of inclination of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the angle of inclination of the near side (right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 reaching the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane.

  The projecting portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the projecting portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the protruding portion 1235 is protruded to a position where it can contact the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 and decelerates the sphere by contacting the sphere.

  The inclined surface 1237 is inclined downward toward the left as viewed from the front. This allows the ball that has landed on the inclined surface 1237 to roll leftward and be guided to the flow path forming portion.

  The detection sensor 1240 has a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the passing of the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the winning number is counted.

  The opening / closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between a case where the ball is rolled toward the detection sensor 1240 and a case where the ball is dropped without contacting the ball, depending on a difference in posture. And a pair of shaft portions 1320 protruding from the short-side end of the plate portion 1310 along the longitudinal direction, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view. And a loaded portion 1330 to be provided.

  The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which the ball rolls in the rising posture (open state), and the length in the short direction is covered in the rising posture (open state) in which the short direction extends in the front-rear direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

  Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered in an arc-shaped cross section at an upper corner in an ascending posture (open state) at an end opposite to the shaft 1320.

  The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

  The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry preventing portion 1331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an interposed transmission portion 1332 extended to the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the interposed transmission portion And an engagement portion 1333 protruding from 1332 to the right in rear view (on the side where the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

  The engaging portion 1333 extends to a position where the engaging portion 1333 interferes with the operation trajectory of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a chamfered in an arc shape on an upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member 1400, not the corners but the chamfered portion 1333a comes into contact with the power transmission member 1400, so that concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. .

  The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disk-shaped main body 1410 and an extension 1420 extending from the main body 1410 in the axial direction.

  The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a protruding pin 1412 protruding from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the direction in which the support hole 1411 is formed.

  The protruding pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and the protruding pin 1412 is displaced with the linear movement of the distal end member 1520 due to the switching of the excitation of the driving device 1500, and the power transmission is performed. The member 1400 rotates.

  The extending portion 1420 includes a rotating tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, a pushing portion 1422 protruding forward from the rotating tip portion 1421, Is provided.

  The driving device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves the movable member by switching the excitation, and a tip member 1520 in an H shape (a shape having concave portions in the upper and lower parts) when viewed from the front, which is disposed at the tip of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , Mainly comprising.

  The tip member 1520 is configured such that the upper concave portion is capable of accommodating the protruding pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, the concave portion is formed in a shape that keeps the protruding pin 1412 housed inside while the power transmission member 1400 rotates (see FIG. 20).

  The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extending portion 1620 extending in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, A surface on the member 1100 side is mainly provided with an extended portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 formed at the surface position and having a greater thickness than the extended portion 1620.

  The extending portion 1620 is arranged on the movement trajectory of the interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the interposition transmission portion 1332 when the opening / closing plate is in the rising posture (open state).

  The ball receiving portion 1630 overlaps with the discharge port 1150 in a tilted position (a position in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is located at a lower position, a storage state) (the ball is discharged through the opening of the discharge port 1150). In such a manner as to be narrowed so as not to be performed.

  Note that the regulating member 1600 is urged by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain a rising posture (a posture in which the end on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is disposed at the upper position, a discharging state).

  The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710, which is a through hole through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes. The ball discharged from the discharge port 1710 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line IX-IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the opening and closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is housed in the rectangular recess 1122, so that the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1110 are covered. The opening / closing plate 1300 can be arranged along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without reducing the distance between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 are juxtaposed at an interval through which a sphere can pass, the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 in the state shown in FIGS. By guiding the ball in between, the ball can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry preventing portion 1331 of the loaded portion 1330 covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 on the front side of the main body member 1100. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and to receive an irregular prize (for example, a ball hitting a nail or the like is skipped in the lateral direction without being guided to the opening and closing plate 1300). 1240).

  Although details will be described later, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, so that the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  The open state of the opening and closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XI-XI in FIG. 10 and 11, the opening and closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 is partially broken and shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated by imaginary lines in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening and closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere. This prevents the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 from falling.

  The sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the covering front plate 1200 rolls on the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 along the slope, and a detection sensor 1240 from the right end thereof. And enters the storage channel 1231.

  In the open state of the opening and closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the front plate 1200. Therefore, compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that the plate portion 1310 is in contact with the covering front plate 1200, the required material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening / closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

  In addition, by reducing the movement trajectory of the distal end of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the short direction, it is easy to avoid interference between a ball passing in front of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the opening / closing plate 1300 when the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

  Here, although the details will be described later, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state, so that the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the sphere passing through the detection sensor 1240 is stored in the storage channel. Is stored in Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state where the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the storage channels 1231 of the present embodiment are formed with a length capable of storing spheres up to a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). When ten balls are stored in the storage device 1231, the tenth ball stops at the position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

  Therefore, the tenth ball becomes a stopper, and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, when the eleventh ball attempts to pass through the detection sensor 1240, the resistance becomes extremely large, and the eleventh ball can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, so that the balls remaining on the opening / closing plate 1300 flow down below the opening / closing plate 1300. Then, the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged by switching the regulating member 1600 to the discharging state in accordance with the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere stops at a position where it is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. I do.

  When the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state. During the switching, the tenth ball receives the load from the ball entry prevention unit 1331 and the tenth ball is stored. It is pushed into the inside of the road 1231 (see FIG. 21B). In other words, when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stops in a state of closing the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and while the opening / closing plate 1300 is being switched to the closed state, the tenth ball entry preventing portion 1331 does not move. Block the opening of the detection sensor 1240 while abutting (rubbing) with the other ball, due to the difference between the timing at which the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entry prevention unit 1331 operates. The moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened can be prevented, and the eleventh ball can be prevented from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  Therefore, there is no need to limit the period from when the specified number of balls is detected by the detection sensor 1240 to when the open / close plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the opening / closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening / closing operation may be started one second after the detection. In the present embodiment, after the tenth ball comes into contact with the ninth ball (after the center of the ball is located on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the ball entry prevention portion 1331). In order to operate the opening / closing plate 1300, control is performed so that the opening / closing plate 1300 opens and closes 0.5 seconds after the detection by the detection sensor 1240.

  According to the operation mode of the opening and closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening and closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In the present embodiment, the prevention (delay) of entry of the ball can be performed only for the eleventh ball. That is, the first to tenth spheres can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special game state as compared to the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole sphere.

  For example, in a structure in which a ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 is once decelerated at the passing position to delay winning of a subsequent ball, it is easy to suppress winning of the eleventh ball, while it is easy to suppress winning of the eleventh ball. When the tenth ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 because the tenth ball also decelerates when each of the tenth balls rolls on the rolling surface 1311 in a partially continuous manner. There is a problem that the game becomes longer and the game is prolonged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the first to tenth balls are decelerated is not employed, and only the eleventh ball is not allowed to enter the detection sensor 1240. Even if the balls flow down in succession, the balls can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at the flow speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

  In addition, even if most of the period during which the open / close plate 1300 is in an open state due to repair of a clogged ball has elapsed and the game has begun at the end of the period, the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 is not affected. Since there is no significant deceleration, more balls can be entered.

  Regarding the eleventh ball, no matter how fast the ball falls toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed that can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the opening / closing plate 1300 starts tilting), regardless of the speed, The ball up to the tenth ball can be physically prevented from passing the eleventh ball through the detection sensor 1240.

  With reference to FIG. 12, the arrangement of the spheres staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 12, spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated.

  Here, a mechanism will be described in which the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 have the same arrangement every time. First, the ball P1 that first enters the empty storage channel 1231 is guided by the guide surface 1231a inclined backward at the lowermost portion of the storage channel 1231 and is arranged at a position where it contacts the front surface of the regulating member 1600. You.

  The ball P1 is weighted by the ball P2 that subsequently enters the ball reaching the lower end, and settles in the arrangement shown in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom of arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side of the sphere P1 when viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 12). That is, the pachinko machine 10 may lean toward the covering front plate 1200 side or may lean toward the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100 depending on the degree of fall in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 12, the protruding portion 1140 is disposed at a position where the protruding tip of the protruding portion 1140 comes into contact with the ball P2. There is no contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

  The ball P2 is weighted by reaching a position where the subsequently entered ball P3 comes into contact with the ball P2. Here, in the present embodiment, even when the ball P2 is located at any position in the front-rear direction, the projecting portion 1235 arranged on the covering front plate 1200 is located on the right side of the ball P2 and the projecting portion 1235. The ball P3 is located between the positions where the ball P3 cannot enter and come into contact with the thin plate member 1210 of the overlaid front plate 1200 (a position where the gap with the ball P2 is kept small).

  Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is located on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is positioned on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side in FIG. 12). ). Therefore, the ball P2 is moved toward the front side (the lower side in FIG. 12) by the load of the ball P3. Thereby, the ball P2 is settled in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the ball P3 receives a load from the subsequently entering ball P4 under substantially the same conditions (except that the front-rear direction is reversed) as the condition that the ball P2 receives the load from the ball P3. Settles in the arrangement shown in FIG.

  That is, the arrangement of the n-th ball in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n + 1) -th ball. Further, in the present embodiment, the fixing of the arrangement of the spheres is not performed by narrowing the storage channel 1231, but while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere, the projecting portions 1140, 1235 is provided. Thereby, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the ball is stored in a fixed arrangement every time an action of storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, the number of stored items can be unified each time.

  With reference to FIG. 13, the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 will be described. FIGS. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XII-XII in FIG. In FIG. 13A, the ball P1 is ejected and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13B, the ball P2 is ejected and the ball P3 is located at the position of the ball P2 in FIG. Is shown in the figure.

  As will be described later, when the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the open / close plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231. When the ball is ejected. The ball disposed at the lowermost end (the ball P1 in FIG. 12) is discharged to the rear side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following ball (the ball P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space formed thereby. The balls are ejected in sequence.

  Here, the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the extended portion (the flow path extending in the left-right direction) of the storage channel 1231 with respect to the horizontal plane. Since the flow speed is higher than that of the ball P2, a gap is generated between the ball P1 and the ball P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, the load applied from the ball P2 to the ball P1 at the time of discharging the ball P1 can be minimized, so that the speed at the time of discharging the ball P1 is uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P1. Can be

  After the sphere P1 is discharged, the following spheres P2, P3, and P4 flow downstream (left side in FIG. 12) along the inclination of the extending portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the ball P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the balls P3 and P4 come into contact with the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 in the process of flowing down (see FIG. 13A). By this contact, the spheres P3 and P4 are changed to the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-back direction components, and pass through the positions of the leading spheres P2 and P3, respectively, and decelerate.

  In other words, the balls P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231 by abutting the protruding portions 1140 and 1235, and the ball stored earlier stops. It is rearranged to the position where it was, and decelerates.

  As a result, a gap is created between the ball P2 and the ball P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load applied to the ball P2 from the ball P3 when the ball P2 is discharged can be minimized. The speed at which the ball P2 is discharged can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P2.

  In other words, since the subsequent ball flows down the storage channel 1231 for a longer distance, the manner of acceleration of the subsequent ball due to gravity changes as the number of stored balls increases, and the discharge mode of the ball P2 (the speed at the time of discharge, There is a possibility that the discharge interval between the ball and the ball P1 may change. However, the change in the discharge mode is determined by the action of the above-described protrusions 1140 and 1235 (the ball that is discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball). (A function of eliminating a load due to gravity) by providing a gap between the ball and the sphere.

  Thereafter, the subsequent spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B to discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231. As described above, by forming a gap between the ball discharged by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the subsequent ball, the discharged ball is discharged without receiving the weight of the subsequent ball. Therefore, the discharge mode of the spheres (speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) can be made uniform regardless of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the projections 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the ball (speed at the time of discharge, discharge interval, and the like) uniform. Note that, in the present embodiment, the discharging mode of the ball requires about 0.2 seconds to discharge one ball. Therefore, by keeping the regulating member 1600 in the discharge state for 2 seconds or more, all of the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged.

  14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 1000. 14 to 16, the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is located above the engagement portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300. It is arranged at a distance.

  Since the interposed transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the upper side and is separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not receive a load from the interposed transmission portion 1332, and the regulating member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). The discharge state is maintained by the urging force.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 projects in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or smaller than the projected area of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240.

  FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device along line XIX-XIX in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 1000. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300 is illustrated, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the open / close plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced in a counterclockwise direction. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

  The interposition transmission portion 1332 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is disposed on the lower side with the rotation of the power transmission member 1400. In this state, the extension 1620 of the restriction member 1600 receives a load from the interposition transmission portion 1332, and the posture of the restriction member 1600. Is switched to the tilting posture (the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 1300, a load associated with the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and the urging force of a torsion spring (not shown) are applied to the regulating member 1600. In the present embodiment, the urging force of the torsion spring is applied. , While maintaining the open / close plate 1300 in the open state while suppressing the driving force of the solenoid 1510. The large biasing force of the torsion spring enables the regulating member 1600 to be immediately switched to the discharging state, thereby leading to the effect that the ball can be quickly discharged from the storage channel 1231. Hereinafter, the adopted structure will be described.

  In this embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, the engaging portion 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation trajectory E1 of the power transmission member 1400, while the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state. , The power transmission member 1400 is pushed out of the motion trajectory E1 along the rotation axis direction of the power transmission member 1400. The movement trajectory E1 is illustrated as the outer shape of the movement trajectory of a portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

  Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400 but the surface forming the rotation direction. And in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft 1320 applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

  That is, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) that urges the regulating member 1600 is directed to the direction in which the opening / closing plate 1300 is pushed back toward the closed state. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

  Thus, once the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the open / close plate 1300 in the open state can be prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the open / close plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the open / close plate 1300 at the maximum value.

  That is, after the solenoid 1510 was excited so as to generate a driving force sufficient to switch the regulating member 1600 to the stored state against the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of the operation, the applied voltage was reduced. However, the open / close plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

  Therefore, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening / closing plate 1300 can be kept open and the regulating member 1600 can be kept in the storage state without being affected by the load.

  In addition, as the fluctuating load applied to the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, a load given by the weight of a sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, the opening / closing plate 1300 has a configuration in which a ball lands on the rolling surface 1311. Therefore, when the ball lands, it receives a load due to the weight of the ball, and the number of balls frequently changes. 1300 is given a varying load. In addition, for example, since a load is applied to the regulating member 1600 from a sphere stored in the storage channel 1231, particularly a sphere arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231, the load is applied to the regulating member 1600. Thus, a fluctuating load is given.

  Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening and closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked, the regulating member 1600 cannot be set to the discharging state while the opening and closing plate 1300 is kept open. Therefore, even if the open / close plate 1300 is illegally maintained in an open state, it is physically determined that more balls (10 or more balls in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the opening and closing plate 1300 from being fraudulently maintained in the open state and increase the number of prize balls to be obtained.

  20 and 21 illustrate the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 in chronological order. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 20 (c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21 (a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21 (b) is a diagram of FIG. 21 (a). 21C is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 along the line XXIb-XXIb, FIG. 21C is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21D is XXId of FIG. 21C. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning device 1000 in the -XXId line.

  20 and 21, in order to facilitate understanding, only the open / close plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIG. 5). The other components are not shown, and the state in which the open / close plate 1300 changes from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in chronological order.

  That is, FIGS. 20A and 20B show a state in which the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500 is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 (a state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited). 20 (c), the state in which the distal end member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). 21), the tip member 1520 is displaced and is located at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2. In FIGS. 21 (c) and 21 (d), the tip member 1520 is displaced. A state where the reference numeral 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 (a final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) is illustrated.

  In FIG. 21 (b), the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the near side is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross-section as used in the illustration is indicated by an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening / closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the ball.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 20 (c), although the power transmission member 1400 rotates, the opening / closing plate 1300 maintains its posture. Note that, in FIG. 20C, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening and closing plate 1300 abut.

  This allows the power transmission member 1400 to be energized before the opening / closing plate 1300 is operated from the closed state to the open state, so that the power transmission member 1400 starts rotating and the opening / closing plate 1300 starts rotating simultaneously. Thus, the driving force required at the start of rotation (at the time of initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be increased.

  From the state shown in FIG. 20 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharging state, the opening / closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and switches between the closed state and the open state. An intermediate state is set (see FIG. 21B).

  In the intermediate state of the opening / closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, when the plate portion 1310 protrudes to the front side, the ball flows down to the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 (the right side in FIG. 21B). The ball can be received by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction of pushing down the rolling surface 1311 (clockwise in FIG. 21B), but power is transmitted by moving the tip member 1520 rightward in rear view (rightward in FIG. 21A). Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, the rotation of the open / close plate 1310 due to the weight of the ball can be prevented.

  Therefore, in the intermediate state of the open / close plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, it is possible to discharge the sphere from the discharge port 1150 and to suppress the ball from passing downward on the front side of the open / close plate 1300. .

  Thus, the problem of maintaining the regulating member 1600 in the discharging state during the time required to discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 and the problem of shortening the closing state of the opening and closing plate 1300 (reducing the interval), which is opposite thereto. In the state shown in FIG. 21 (a), while the discharge of the ball is continued, the plate portion 1310 is extended to the middle position, and the ball is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the covering front plate 1200. , Can be achieved together.

  At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21 (b), the opening / closing plate 1300 is positioned so as to prevent the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240 while preventing the ball from passing downward. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, the rolling surface 1311 is located at a position separated from the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 below, so that the rolling surface 1311 in the state shown in FIG. Can be prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. This can prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the regulating member 1600 is in the discharging state, and can effectively maintain the function of limiting the winning number of balls by the first variable winning device 1000. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21D, at the same time when the open / close plate 1300 is switched to the open state, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the driving device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be used also as the driving force of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

  20 and 21, the case where the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state is described. However, when the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is grasped by going back to FIG. 20 and FIG. can do.

  When switching from the open state to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21D is changed to the state shown in FIG. 21B. Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening and closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operation direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the loaded portion 1330.

  That is, since the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state after the operation of the open / close plate 1300, it is impossible to maintain the open / close plate 1300 in the open state after the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state. Can be. Thus, for example, it is possible to prevent an irregular winning in which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts being discharged.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 as long as the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball abuts against the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. In the present embodiment, this can be made impossible.

  That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the open / close plate 1300 is being changed from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward. When the sphere comes into contact with the sphere, no load is generated to support the opening / closing plate 1300 acting in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 descends with the weight of the ball, so that the ball cannot be bounced to the detection sensor 1240. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the irregular winning from occurring.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 22B is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. FIG. 22 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22 (b)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored. , And the type of the entrance that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot A, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot B is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 49” (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot B is reached, the jackpot game of eight rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 1200 prize balls.

  The jackpot C is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot C is reached, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 600 prize balls.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), in any case, the first variable prize winning device 1000 sets the first operation pattern. Works with Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out that can be obtained by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. As the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the jackpot game increases.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, while a jackpot of 4 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 50%. So basically you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the four-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the fifteen-round jackpot game, so that the launch of a ball aiming at the subsequent jackpot acquisition can be started earlier.

  On the other hand, when a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the second entrance 640) results in a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, The jackpot a is defined in association with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the big hit a, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 as in the case of the big hit A. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot b is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 89” (see 202b5 in FIG. 22B).

  When the jackpot b is reached, a jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 (details will be described later). In this case, the prize balls paid out to the player are necessarily less than 2250 (1200 in the present embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of the jackpot a.

  The jackpot c is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

  In the case of the jackpot c, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 (details will be described later). In this case, the number of prize balls paid out to the player is inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in this embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of jackpot a, and the prize paid out in each round The time required for ball and jackpot games fluctuates.

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn in a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the type of the big hit. Due to this difference in the operation pattern, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, and the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, the time required for the jackpot game can be made longer when the number of payouts is small (big hit b and big hit c) than when the number of payouts is large (big hit a). That is, when the jackpot (the jackpot b and the jackpot c) with a small number of payouts is acquired, the timing at which the ball is hit for the next jackpot is delayed as compared with the case of the jackpot a.

  Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency (Including the number of payouts).

  As a result, in the breakdown of the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entry to the second entrance 640), the jackpot (jackpot a) that can receive a large amount of payout in a time efficient manner and the time inefficient payout. It is possible to provide a small number of jackpots (jackpot b and jackpot c), and it is possible to increase the profit of the player obtained when the jackpot a is acquired. As a result, the difference in the number of payouts when playing the game continuously for a predetermined time while maintaining the probability of obtaining the jackpot a large (the difference between the maximum value of the total number of obtained balls and the minimum value of the total number of obtained balls). (Difference) can be increased.

  As described above, during the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the hit of the normal symbol is reduced. It is set to be longer (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and if the big hit is made, the special design prone to the big hit a (maximum hitting big hit) is repeated. This makes it easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 22C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as the determination value that is the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 22C). Further, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67 and the second random number table 202c, the normal symbol It is determined whether it is a hit or not. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23 (b) is a time measurement of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. FIG. 23C is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the third operation pattern.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening and closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the first operation pattern>
In the case of a jackpot game in which the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time period in which the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be entirely discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored spheres. Is done. Therefore, in order to discharge 10 balls, it takes 2 seconds for the furniture.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  In the first operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which no ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the ball during the first interval time Int1 between rounds. Therefore, even in the second and subsequent rounds, the specified number (in this embodiment, ten) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the maximum length of the first operation time T1 of each round is achieved. Then, the round game R can be ended without waiting for 30 seconds. Therefore, the round game R can be advanced promptly.

  Thereafter, in the same manner, the round game R of the third round up to the fifteenth round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between the rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

  The second interval time between rounds Int2 is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, and the spheres are discharged at intervals of about 0.2 seconds per one regardless of the number of stored spheres. Is done. Therefore, since the number of balls that can be discharged in one second is five, for example, when ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the balls are discharged in the second interval time Int2 between rounds. However, five spheres still remain in the storage channel 1231.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  In the second operation pattern, it is possible to form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round by discharging the ball during the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third to fifteenth rounds are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds between each round game R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game are compared. The ball can be fired at intervals of at least 0.6 seconds.

  First, when a jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern, the time required for ten balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is at least 6 seconds. When the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time between rounds Int1, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( = OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int1 (2s)) × 15R + ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 2250 (= 15 × 10C × 15R).

  On the other hand, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, ten balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only five balls can be won in the second and subsequent rounds. The time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (= OP (10s) + (T1 (6s) + Int2 (1s)) + (T1 (30s) + Int2 (1s)) × 13R + T1 (30s) + Int1 ( 2s) + ED (11s)). Further, the payout number is 1200 (= (10C × 1R + 5C × 14R) × 15) because only five balls can be won in the round game R of the second and subsequent rounds.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern, it takes three times or more as long as the jackpot game is performed in the first operation pattern. Will be dramatically worse.

  Thereby, the interest of the player in the case of performing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern can be improved. That is, the rare value of the jackpot A and the jackpot a can be increased, the attention to the jackpot type notified for each jackpot can be improved, and the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Although the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 second, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be set to various numerical values, and can be changed in each round.

  For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to use

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time between rounds Int2 is set to 0.5 second, since only two balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If 10 are stored, the round game R is started with eight balls remaining. Accordingly, in the round game R of the round, only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the payout number is also small (30).

  In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, since seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. If the individual balls are stored, the round game R is started with three balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, seven balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) of payouts can be desired.

  In addition, the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds can be set to 2.0 seconds (or more time). In this case, at the start of the immediately following round game R, no balls remain in the storage channel 1231 and ten balls can be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to reduce the progress time of the ball and the round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. The drive control is performed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  The state in which no balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the second round of the round game R due to the discharge of the balls during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is formed. In this embodiment, ten pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls can be paid out, and the first operating time T1 of each round can be obtained. The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, the prize balls can be paid out in the same manner as in the first operation pattern, while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

  Thereafter, similarly, the third to tenth round round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 interposed between the round round games R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the tenth round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the eleventh round game R is started.

  In the eleventh round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by a timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the eleventh round round game R, The open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eleventh round of the round game R ends.

  Thereafter, similarly, the twelfth to fifteenth round round games R are repeated with the second inter-round interval time Int2 interposed between the round games R, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  By discharging the ball during the second interval time Int2 between rounds, a state in which the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R in the eleventh round and thereafter can be formed. Therefore, after the eleventh round, a state may occur in which the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

  Also, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is reduced as compared to the tenth round. Accordingly, the total number of payouts is smaller than the jackpot of the first operation pattern (1875 = (10C × 10R + 5C × 5R) × 15), and the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is reduced. It can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on what round game is being performed.

  In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the end of the round is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a mode in which the number of payouts is small at the beginning but the number of payouts increases toward the end, or a mode in which the number of payouts has a peak in a middle round.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, the degree of payout (number or speed, etc.) in the jackpot game is changed depending on the round game R to be performed, thereby giving the jackpot game a speed and improving the interest of the player. Can be done.

  In addition, when the jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, the player does not change from the first operation pattern until the round game R of the tenth round. A jackpot game can be performed with the expectation that the number can be obtained.

  Further, the second interval time Int2 between rounds set in one second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary numerical value corresponding to each round for each big hit type. For example, in some jackpot types, the second interval time Int2 between the rounds of the third operation pattern is set to 1.5 seconds, and in another certain jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between the rounds of the third operation pattern is set. For example, the interval time Int2 can be set to 0.5 seconds in an odd round and set to 1.0 seconds in an even round.

  That is, by further subdividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games having different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, after the eleventh round, it is possible to make the number of balls finally paid out unpredictable until the jackpot game ends, and it is possible to improve the attention to the jackpot game.

  Further, the change in the degree of payout and the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) may be made to correspond. For example, when a jackpot game is performed in the third operation pattern, a figure of a running character is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the stamina of the character remains in the beginning (the first round). The running character runs smoothly, and many prize balls are paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina is depleted (in the last round), the displayed character becomes difficult to run and starts walking, and in conjunction with that, the payout of prize balls decreases.

  In this way, by associating the degree of prize ball payout with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible for the player to easily transfer emotions to the liquid crystal effect, and to enhance the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

  In addition, by performing the jackpot game in the above-described second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, each round can be advanced based on the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the jackpot game can be performed in a predetermined manner. It can progress over the production time. In other words, for example, when the ball wins in the first specific winning opening 1000a at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the time of the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of the moving image that is loop-reproduced for a predetermined rendering time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from ending before the effect during the big hit is completely viewed.

  In addition, when performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a support message from a character (such as “Try your best”) is displayed, the longer the time of the jackpot game, the easier it is to display a support message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thereby, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be advanced (rather happily) without giving stress to the player.

  On the other hand, it is also possible to display a mode in which the player gives more stress. For example, a case will be described in which a character that runs during a jackpot game is displayed, and that the character takes a break in a break area during an interval between rounds. In the first operation pattern, the interval between rounds is reached each time a predetermined number of balls are won, so that the character can complete the run without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the eleventh round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the interval between rounds will not be reached unless the specified number of prizes have been won and the maximum value of the first operation time T1 (30 seconds) has to be waited. Therefore, the effect of accumulating fatigue can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between the rounds is short in the first place, the character can be produced. It is possible to perform the production that there is no time to rest. Therefore, since the player can visually recognize the exhausted character and give stress to the player, the ambition of the player to recover in the next big hit can be enhanced.

  Further, in the case where the same display is performed, an effect may be provided in which the character rehydrates at the timing of winning. In this case, while the first operation pattern can sufficiently supply water, in the eleventh and subsequent rounds of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the number of times of water supply (the number of winnings) is the first. Since the running period of the character (the period of the jackpot game) becomes longer as well as the operation pattern becomes shorter, the amount of water that can be replenished is shorter than the sweat from the character, and the character becomes tired more and more. A number of effects can be performed without any deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). As a result, it is possible to make the state of the character correspond to the profit (payout ball including time efficiency) obtained by the player, and to determine how much the jackpot that the player has won is , A jackpot or a super jackpot) can be easily recognized by the player through the effect of the entire jackpot game.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of balls that can be stored inside the first variable winning device 1000 is fixed has been described. However, the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment has the number of balls that can be stored inside. Is configured to be changeable. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In FIG. 24, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the arrangement of the balls stored in the second storage channel 2251 when a ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255 a are illustrated by hidden lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a driving device 1500 similar to those of the first embodiment, and a body member slightly different from that of the first embodiment. 2100, a covered front plate 2200, a regulating member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and further a second variable winning device 2800 newly introduced in the second embodiment. In addition, the second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable entry device 2800 includes a second specific winning opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a reference for payout passes in a big hit game.

  The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a which is normally closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). (Or until 10 balls are won), the operation of releasing is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). Although the details will be described later, the opening operation can be performed in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern and fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large number of balls win the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

  The main body member 2100 has the same configuration as the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the accommodating portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170). , A slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole formed in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is a through hole similarly formed in the thin plate member 1110 and which can be fitted with the second detection sensor 2255. A pair of wall portions arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and a drive guide rib 2183 extending linearly in the left and right direction; and a pair of drive guide ribs along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110. A transmission guide rib 2184 whose walls are arranged side by side in parallel and extend linearly in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 21 that supports the transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800. And 5, a mainly includes.

  The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole for guiding the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 provided on the cover front plate 2200 is inserted.

  Each of the ribs 2183 and 2184 is a rib that guides a sliding operation of the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

  The covering front plate 2200 is connected to the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the housing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) provided in the housing front plate 1200 of the first embodiment. A second storage section 2250 is provided.

  The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back side of the thin plate formed at the surface position with the thin plate member 1210, has an upward opening, and has an end connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. The storage channel 2251 and the second detection disposed in the second storage channel 2251 in a posture near the upper end portion of the second storage channel 2251 with the opening along the direction in which the second storage channel 2251 extends. The sensor 2255 closes the space between the front plate of the second storage section 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the left side of the opening of the second storage channel 2251 in a front view, and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left. And an inclined surface 2257.

  When the sphere is stored by closing the discharge port 1150 when the sphere passes through the second detection sensor 2255 and is stored inside the second storage part 2250, the number of stored spheres is reduced. It is configured to be 14 at the maximum.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is a detection device that has the second specific winning opening 2255a and produces the same operation as the detection sensor 1240. In other words, when the ball enters the housing portion 1230 by switching the open / close plate 1300, the ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and the ball is switched via the second housing portion 2250 by the switching of the second variable winning device 2800. When the ball enters 1230, the ball is detected by the second detection sensor 2255.

  The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening and closing plate 1300 is provided. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and do not enter the second storage channel 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are directed to the channel forming portion on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300. You. Therefore, during the jackpot game, regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open, the player opens any of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a. In the state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by performing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an unskilled player can easily play a game.

  The second detection sensor 2255 is provided inside the second storage channel 2251 with a margin for arranging one ball on the upstream side. Therefore, at the timing when the slide plate 2840 is about to close (the timing at which the remaining one ball becomes a specified number as it passes through the second detection sensor 2255), a plurality of balls continuously flow into the second storage channel 2251. And a structure in which a predetermined number or more of balls can enter.

  The regulating member 2600 has a configuration in which the regulating member 1600 of the first embodiment is provided (the shaft portion 1610, the extending portion 1620, and the ball receiving portion 1630), and the shaft portion 1610 is further extended leftward. A second extending portion 2640 formed in a symmetrical relationship with the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction of FIG.

  The second extended portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates, as described later. Due to the formation of the second extending portion 2640, the regulating member 2600 allows the second variable winning device 2800 or the opening and closing plate 1300 to perform the switching operation of the second variable winning device 2800 and the switching operation of the opening and closing plate 1300. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

  The second variable winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left and right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and a mid-abdomen while one end is supported by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830, and extending from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100; A rod-shaped interposed rod portion 2850 having one end fixed to the member 2820 and slidably disposed inside the drive guide rib 2183, and a transmission guide rib having one end disposed at a position capable of abutting the interposed rod portion 2850. The other end extends along the inside of the second member 2184 and the other end of the second A transmission rod portion 2860 that is disposed against possible position, mainly comprises.

  The interposed rod portion 2850 is guided by the drive guide ribs 2183 in the left-right direction, while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured so as to be closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer (the distance between the drive guide ribs 2183 is narrowed). The movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

  The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided by the transmission guide rib 2184 in the up-down direction, while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured to be closer to each other (narrower between them) as the separation distance of the main body member 2100 from the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer, so that the transmission rod 2860 The movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

  Note that the surfaces of the end portions where the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. Thus, it is possible to smoothly transmit the force from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

  FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 has an arcuate cross-sectional shape on the opposite surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860, and the regulating member 2600 is directed toward the discharge state. The urging force of the urging torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod 2860 via the facing surface 2641. Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained at the standby position in the state shown in FIGS.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, it is determined that a ball cannot enter both the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable prize device 2800 for enabling a ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

  27 (a) to 27 (c), the operations of the regulating member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. FIGS. 27A to 27C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. FIG. 27 (a) to 27 (c), for ease of understanding, illustration of components unnecessary for description is omitted, and the state of the slide plate 2840 changes from the closed state to the open state. Are illustrated in chronological order.

  In FIG. 27A, the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, and the tip member 2820 is located at the position farthest from the solenoid 2810. In FIG. 27B, immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the distal end member 2820 is disposed at the intermediate position in the movement range is disposed in a state in which the distal end member 2820 is drawn most toward the solenoid 2810 (the final arrival position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). Each state is shown in the figure. In the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state for preventing the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255. In the state shown in FIG. , An open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, regulating member 2600 is in the discharged state. Therefore, when the solenoid 2810 is in the non-excited state, the operation of the second variable winning device 2800 can prevent the regulating member 2600 from being in the storage state. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, a control mode in which the operation of the solenoid 2810 is not generated (maintained without excitation) (for example, a control mode in the first embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

  When a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the ball can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod 2860 via the interposed rod 2850 to start displacing. I do. Here, in the present embodiment, the portion where the interposed rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 contact each other is slightly separated in the state of FIG. The operation of the bar 2860 starts almost simultaneously.

  When the transmission rod 2860 is displaced downward by being pushed by the end of the interposition rod 2850, the lower end of the transmission rod 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extension 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulating member 2600 is slightly pushed down, and is in the state between the discharge state and the storage state.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the distal end member 2830 has completely moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down to the end position by the intervening rod portion 2850, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27C, the interposed member 2850 slides from the transmission rod 2860 to the transmission rod 2860 by sliding so that the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod 2860. Can flow in a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the interposition member 2850.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposition member 2850 from fluctuating along the moving direction of the interposition member 2850 due to the fluctuation of the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulating member 2600. The load applied to the tip member 2820 via the regulating member 2600 can be prevented from fluctuating. Therefore, the driving of the solenoid 2810 for maintaining the slide plate 2840, which changes state due to the displacement of the tip member 2820, in the open state. It is possible to prevent the force from fluctuating. Thus, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

  Further, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod 2860, and the state of the regulating member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, the response of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810 can be improved. Thereby, fine adjustment of the state change timing of the regulating member 2600 is possible, so that it is possible to suppress a deviation between the control value of the discharge number specified for each round interval time in the jackpot game and the actual discharge number, The number of discharges can be stabilized.

  FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 along the line XXVIII-XXVIII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent of the contact portion between the lower end of the transmission rod 2860 and the opposing surface 2641 of the regulating member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod 2860. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) for urging the regulating member 2600 toward the arrangement in the discharge state effectively acts on the transmission rod 2860.

  Accordingly, when the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) to the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the regulation by the intervening rod 2850 is released, the urging force of the torsion spring is released. As a result, the transmission rod 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

  FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol according to the present embodiment.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Note that the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is: The description is omitted because it is the same as that described in the first embodiment. In the following, a case in which a lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) results in a big hit in this embodiment. explain.

  Specifically, in the case of a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on entry to the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is associated with a jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

  When the big hit d is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the fourth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 (the details will be described later). In this case, the player can receive the payout of the number obtained by adding the limited increase to about 2250 prize balls.

  The jackpot e is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 99” (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

  In the case of the jackpot e, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the fifth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 (details will be described later). In this case, the prize balls paid out to the player are the number of payouts obtained by adding a limited increase to 2250 prize balls, but the difficulty in increasing the number of payouts is smaller than that in the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the payout number is increased as well as the payout number, the time required for the jackpot game is much larger than the case of the jackpot d.

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn in a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the type of the big hit. Due to the difference in the operation patterns, the number of jackpot rounds can be kept unchanged, and the time required for the jackpot game can be changed while providing a difference in the number of payouts.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (the first to seventh round game R). When the first variable prize device 2000 receives more balls than the specified number, extra payouts are subtracted in the subsequent specific round game R (the eighth round game R) and the game proceeds to the eighth round. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in the round game R after the specific round game R, the additional ball paid out by allowing the first variable prize device 2000 to enter a ball of a specified number or more can be obtained by the player without being deducted. It is configured as follows.

  In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, the game method in which the player can obtain the highest profit as the profit including the time efficiency is a fixed number of prizes until the eighth round, and the round game R after the ninth round The aim is to increase the number of payouts in order to win more than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to insert a predetermined number of balls or more in the first variable winning device 2000 depending on the round game R of the round, and the player's attention to the jackpot game Can be improved.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot d, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means sets the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. And the second round game R is started after the elapse of the first interval time Int1 between the rounds.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls ejected from the outlet 1150 during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that in each round game R, more than 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 2255a. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum storage number when the ball is entered from the second storage channel 2251 side is set to 14, so in the jackpot game of the jackpot d, the number of winnings exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. It is limited to four through jackpot games. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that can be obtained by the player playing the jackpot game with the jackpot d can be limited to 60 (= 15 × 4C). As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from greatly changing due to a difference in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, and the like). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy profits fairly irrespective of the experience value of the player.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third round up to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 2810 controls the driving of the solenoid 2810 so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot e, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time for discharging 10 balls from the discharge port 1150. In the present embodiment, more than 10 balls (for example, 11 or 12) can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a in each round game R depending on the timing of passing through the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, the number of balls ejected from the outlet 1150 during the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, so that in each round game R, more than 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 2255a. At the start of the immediately following round game R, the excess number of balls remains in the storage channel 1231.

  Thereafter, similarly, the third to seventh round game Rs are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 interposed between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the seventh round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. After the elapsed time, the round game R of the eighth round is started.

  In the eighth round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the eighth round of the round game R, The open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the round game R of the eighth round is completed.

  Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, if balls exceeding the specified number have passed through the second specific winning opening 2255a, the number of balls exceeding the specified number at the start of the round R in the eighth round Since the balls remain in the storage channel 1231, only the winning of the number obtained by subtracting the remaining number (the number exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round) from the specified number in the round game R of the eighth round can be performed. Therefore, the payout of the prize balls including the eighth round is equalized to the payout of the specified number of prize balls up to the eighth round. In addition, since the specified number of pachinko balls cannot be won in the eighth round of the round game R, the player must wait 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, before the next round. It will shift to the game.

  Therefore, the player suffers from the loss of the prize balls paid out by the 7th round being lost, and the time loss that the round R of the 8th round becomes unnecessarily long. Will receive. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game carefully so as not to win more balls than the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of winning of a ball exceeding the specified number, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

  If there is no winning exceeding the specified number by the seventh round, the specified number of balls can be passed through the one specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the specified number of balls are paid out. In addition, the round game R of the eighth round can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, a predetermined number of prize balls can be paid out while advancing the round game R quickly.

  Therefore, in the big hit game of the big hit e, intentionally suppressing winnings exceeding the specified number up to the seventh round leads to the player's profit. Therefore, the player's attention in the game up to the seventh round can be kept high.

  When the big hit game R of the eighth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After a lapse of time Int1, a ninth round game R is started. Note that, at the start of the ninth round of the round game R, a state in which no ball remains in the storage channel 1231 can be set.

  In the ninth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is controlled to drive the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the ninth round, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the ninth round of the round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the tenth round to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In the round game R of the ninth and subsequent rounds, since the opening and closing plate 1300 does not perform the opening and closing operation, the prize balls paid out by the balls that have won the second specific winning opening 2255a in excess of the specified number after the ninth round are , Can be received by the player without being deducted.

  Therefore, in the case of performing the jackpot game of the jackpot e, the jackpot game R is suppressed so that the winning in the second specific winning opening 2255a exceeding the specified number does not occur in the jackpot game R up to the seventh round. Aiming for a prize in the second specific prize port 2255a exceeding the number is a game method in which a player can obtain the largest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

  That is, in the round game R of each round, by inserting balls exceeding the specified number into the second specific winning opening 2255a, it is possible to cause a case where the player gains profit and a case where the player suffers damage. Thereby, different playability can be provided for each round of the jackpot game, and the attention of the player who performs the jackpot game can be improved (it is possible to prevent the casual play of the jackpot game). .

  Further, according to the present operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive the payout of the additional prize ball by causing the second specific winning opening 2255a to win the ball exceeding the specified number is substantially performed after the ninth round. Can be restricted. This makes it possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to a difference in game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.), and to prevent a large change in the payout balls. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that allows a player to enjoy profits fairly irrespective of the experience value of the player.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the sphere that reaches the flow path forming portion when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state and flows down to the downstream of the open / close plate 1300 when the open / close plate is in the open state falls as it is. In the first variable winning device 3000, the falling of the ball is delayed when the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, and a part of the ball can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of a first variable winning device 3000 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXII-XXXII in FIG. 31, and FIG. It is a rear surface perspective view of the installation front board 3200.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an open / close plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a regulating member 1600, and a rear cover 1700 similar to those of the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a covered front plate 3200 slightly different from those of the first embodiment are provided. FIG. 32 shows a closed state of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  The main body member 3100 has the same configuration as the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment (the thin plate member 1110, the accommodating portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170). An additional winning opening 3181 arranged in a manner to be connected to the left side wall of the covering front plate 3200 in front view on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and upward from the left side wall portion of the additional winning opening 3181 in front view. And a curved extension plate 3182 which extends in a curved manner.

  The additional winning opening 3181 is a ball opening for discharging a ball flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and when balls enter the additional winning opening 3181, the upper limit is 15 balls. Prize balls are paid out. In the present embodiment, it is set so that eleven balls are paid out.

  The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts the passage of a ball flowing down the game area by setting the gap in the up-down direction in the game area to be equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. . In addition, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed to have a shape that is inclined downward from the middle abdomen toward the left in front view, and is inclined downward from the middle abdomen toward the right to the front view.

  The laid front plate 3200 has a structure (a thin plate member 1210, a side wall portion 1220, a housing portion 1230, and a detection sensor 1240) included in the laid front plate 1200 of the first embodiment, and a space between the side wall portion 1220 and the housing portion 1230. , A drop delay plate 3250 extending from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface.

  The drop delay plate 3250 is disposed on the front side of the movement trajectory of the open / close plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the open / close plate 3250, and is disposed below the shaft portion 1320 of the open / close plate 1300 and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. An extended plate portion 3251 that extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 and connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210 and has a concave upper surface from a curved shape. And a rolling arc portion 3252 to be formed.

  The drop delay plate 3250 has a long shape to the left and right, and is decelerated so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the ball to flow down (including bouncing and rolling down) a distance of half the length of the plate. Formed from the shape In addition, the opening / closing plate 1300 is formed in a mode in which the ball flows down in one second or less when the ball flows down a half distance of the length of the plate in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the extension plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed so as to be inclined such that the closer the detection sensor 1240 is, the longer the separation width from the main body member 3100 is. The housing includes a facing surface 3251a and a terminal surface 3251b that faces the side wall portion 1220 of the housing portion 1230 and is spaced from the housing portion 1230 by a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  The distance between the opposing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is determined by the radius of the sphere at the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). At the intermediate position (the middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32), the distance is switched to be equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere. The diameter is equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end of the opposing surface 3251 a is formed along the front-rear direction, and smoothly intersects the thin plate member 1210 of the covered front plate 3200. (Tangent lines drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction are along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

  The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the sphere that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the covered front plate 3200 rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the most upstream upstream position Pf1 to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls away from the rolling arc portion 3252, is moved to the downstream position Pf2. Flow down through

  In the present embodiment, since the distance between the facing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3250 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere, the distance until the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3 is reached. , Is prevented from falling through the rolling arc portion 3252. Therefore, the ball will fall from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, the manner in which the ball flows down on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

  34 (a) to 34 (c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable prize device 3000 along the line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. Note that FIG. 34B illustrates a sphere arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34C illustrates a sphere arranged at the downstream position Pf2. In FIG. 34, the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 (b) and 34 (c), the sphere rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and contacts the plate portion 1310. The diameter of the ball, which flows down to the contact portion with the falling delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the sphere in the axial direction), is reduced as the ball flows down.

  That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34B, the diameter r1 up to the portion where the sphere comes into contact with the drop delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34 (c), the radial length r2 up to the portion where the ball contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the ball.

  These diameter lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of gyration of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. In other words, if the rotation speed of the ball is the same, the rolling speed of the ball decreases (the ball is delayed) as the diameter lengths r1 and r2 are shorter. According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed to be inclined such that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Accordingly, the turning radius of the sphere is gradually reduced as the sphere flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 31). Accordingly, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced as the ball flows down the falling delay plate 3250 to the downstream side.

  Further, when the extension plate portion 3251 extends along the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300, FIG. 34 (c) showing the axial view thereof shows a state as compared with the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). The ball is displaced downward in the state shown in parentheses). That is, as the ball flows down the fall delay plate 3250 to the downstream side, the ball can be separated from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the ball flowing down the fall delay plate 3250 can be diverted from the first specific winning opening 1000a. it can.

  Accordingly, even if the ball entry preventing portion 1331 is not formed on the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball flows down the falling delay plate 3250 to the downstream end, and is directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with its momentum. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is won by flying.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rises to the open state while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a) and 35 (b) are partial front views of the first variable prize device 3000, and FIG. 35 (c) is the first variable prize device 3000 along the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35 (b). FIG. Note that FIG. 35 (a) illustrates the closed state of the open / close plate 1300, FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c) illustrate the open state of the open / close plate 1300, and FIG. 35 (c) illustrates the open / close plate 1300. The outer shapes of the plate portion 1310 and the ball in the closed state are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. In addition, FIGS. 35A and 35B illustrate an example of a ball that has entered the flow path forming unit of the first variable winning device 3000.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), when the open / close plate 1300 is closed, the ball that has landed on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 moves rightward in a front view along the extending direction of the extension plate portion 3251. If the open / close plate 1300 keeps the closed state as it is, it falls after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the above-described extension plate portion 3251, so that the rolling time of the ball can be maintained long and the attention to the ball can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (b), when the open / close plate 1300 moves upward (rotates) toward the open state while the ball rolls, the ball pressed against the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly moves up along the arc shape of the dynamic arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent of the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 at the portion where the ball abuts at the start of the movement of the ball is oriented in the front-rear direction, the operation of the ball at the start of the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 can be smoothed. it can.

  The downflow direction when the sphere moves up and rolls over the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 and flows down is parallel to the downflow direction illustrated in FIG. Therefore, compared to the case where the flowing direction of the ball changes completely different directions before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt by the player who visually recognizes the operation of the ball before and after the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300. it can.

  As described above, when the sphere is arranged below the plate portion 1310 of the open / close plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35C), the sphere is opened by the upward movement of the open / close plate 1300. By pushing back (backflow) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300 in the above, it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the ball which is arranged below the opening / closing plate 1300 and once cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a is brought into a state where it can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a by ascending movement. Since it can be returned, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In other words, FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b) both show a state where the sphere is arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240 since there is still a possibility that the sphere passes through the detection sensor 1240. It can be said that. That is, by the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the ball can be maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state.

  Further, even when it becomes impossible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 flows down in a direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player may win the first specific winning opening 1000a, and to maintain the player's attention.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the open / close plate 1300 forms a closed state, the fall of the ball reaching the front side of the open / close plate 1300 is delayed, and when the open / close plate 1300 changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311 By configuring so that it can be resurrected above, it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball that arrives in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval time between rounds in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. As a result, the number of balls passing through the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening and closing plate 1300 from being hindered due to the arrangement of the ball on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure in which the ball can freely flow down the front side of the opening / closing plate as in a conventional gaming machine, the ball is sandwiched between the opening / closing plate and the glass plate by operating the opening / closing plate, thereby opening and closing the ball. There has been a problem that the opening of the board is hindered, which may cause a loss to the player.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 in front of the opening / closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotation axis of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the ball is maintained substantially constant (restriction). can do. Therefore, the ball is pinched between the open / close plate 1300 and the glass plate as compared with the case where the ball freely flows down the front side of the open / close plate 1300 and the distance of the ball from the rotation axis changes freely. The risk that the operation of the plate 1300 is hindered can be reduced. Note that, in the present embodiment, the sphere is sandwiched between the glass plate and the opening / closing plate 1300 while the opening / closing plate 1300 is changing to the open state, and the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300 may be hindered. The drop delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the ball is maintained at the position.

  36 (a) and 36 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the manner in which the ball that has reached the first variable winning device 3000 flows down. In FIG. 36 (a), in a case where the ball is hit and left, the two balls reaching the first variable prize device 3000 flow down in a time-series manner, and in FIG. 36 (b), for example, the first ball By performing a special hitting method (so-called “twisting”) in which the ball is hit weakly and the second ball is hit harder, the ball when two balls are connected to reach the first variable winning device 3000. Are shown in chronological order.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the ball is hit and the first ball P1 and the second ball P2 reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 at a predetermined interval, the ball is hit. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state due to the winning of the first specific winning opening 1000a by P1, the ball P2 can still be in a state arranged on the upstream side of the drop delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 completely flows down the drop delay plate 3250, so that the ball can be easily maintained on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 until the next time the opening / closing plate 1300 is opened. Can be.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), when two balls continuously reach the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, the ball P1 wins the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed. When switching to the state, the ball P2 is arranged near the position (falling position Pf3) immediately before the detection sensor 1240, so that it is not possible to wait until the opening / closing plate 1300 is next opened, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from plate 3250.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, compared to the case where two balls flow down consecutively by a special hitting method, the case where two balls flow down at a predetermined interval by releasing (normal hitting) is used. This makes it easier to receive the action of the drop delay plate 3250 (changing a ball that has reached the front of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the interval time between rounds so that the ball can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game by a special hitting method such as twisting.

  FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. FIG. 37 illustrates a state immediately after the state of the open / close plate 1300 changed from the closed state to the open state, and illustrates a sphere that jumps upward by colliding with the open / close plate 1300.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open / close plate 1300 in the open state, the bouncing as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball that has landed on the open / close plate 1300 is rebounded during the upward movement of the open / close plate 1300. Only in this case, the sphere bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

  The subsequent flow of the bouncing ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 1300 again or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. Is done. Therefore, the player can receive the prize ball by the bouncing ball. Therefore, a ball that arrives at the opening / closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening / closing plate 1300 is being switched to the open state eventually enters the first out port 66, and the player cannot obtain a profit. Can be prevented.

  Further, even when a ball wins in the additional winning opening 3181, a prescribed number (ten in the present embodiment) of balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a separately. The payout by winning the mouth 3181 results in award balls (a profit for an additional amount) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, it is possible to cause a difference in the profit obtained by the player depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 at a special timing when the opening and closing plate 1300 is being switched to the open state. , It is possible to improve the attention of the ball that flows down.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a specially changed state (high probability state) of a special symbol is given as an added value after the end of the jackpot regardless of a difference in a flow state of a ball that has entered the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 according to the fourth embodiment includes a probability variation determination unit that determines a right to shift to a certain symbol change state (high-probability state) of a special symbol based on a difference in the manner in which a ball flows. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is shown in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transmission window is formed in the game board 13 below the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability variation that is provided on the back side of the game board 13 is changed. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (a main body member 1100, a covering front plate 1200, an opening / closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a regulating agent). 1600 and a rear cover 1700), and further includes a new probability variation determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

  The probability variation determination unit 4800 includes a communication path 4810 that is a flow path through which the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 flows and extends vertically downward, and a bifurcated flow that is communicated with the lower end of the communication path 4810. The probability variation determination channel 4820 that is a road, the specific region 4830 that is arranged to communicate from the channel on the left side in front view of the probability variation determination channel 4820, and the specific region 4830 that communicates from the channel on the right side in front view A non-specific area 4840, a distribution device 4850 arranged to be able to interfere with a game ball at a branch portion of the probability variation determination channel 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 for detecting the passage of a game ball in the specific area 4830, A non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects the passage of the game ball in the specific area 4540.

  The communication path 4810 is formed to have a length that elapses approximately one second until the ball that has entered from the outlet reaches the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  The distribution device 4850 is disposed so as to protrude inside the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and allows the sphere to flow down to the specific area 4830 (forms an open state) and to flow to the non-specific area 4840 (changes to the closed state). It mainly includes a distributing member 4851 operable between a closed position (formed) and a solenoid 4852 for driving the distributing member 4851.

  The probability change determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding the acquisition of the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state) only in the special round during the jackpot game (the fifth round in this embodiment). In the special round, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game balls to pass. At this time, the specific area 4830 is in an open state, and the non-specific area 4840 is in a closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the big hit game, a transition is made to a special symbol positive change state (high probability state). In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased, so that the ball can easily win the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, 40 It is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1 /

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times, and the special symbol lottery is performed 50 times. It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination.

  In the present embodiment, five types of special symbols such as “big hit D”, “big hit E”, “big hit F”, “big hit G”, and “big hit f” are provided (see FIG. 40). Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 4000 and The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state).

  FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type of the entrance that triggered the symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 29”. Is associated with a jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot D, five jackpot games are executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot E is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 49” (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot E, a 5-round jackpot game is executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 675 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state).

  The jackpot F is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 79” (see 202b43 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot F, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot G is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99” (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot G, a 5-round jackpot game is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of about 750 prize balls, and can rarely acquire the right to shift to the surely changed state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) with a probability of 50%. Can be reliably obtained. On the other hand, even in the remaining 50%, it is possible to rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, The jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  In the case of the jackpot f, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850, as in the case of the jackpot D. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  The jackpot g is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “95 to 99” (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

  When the jackpot is g, the jackpot game of five rounds is executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls and, rarely, can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state).

  As described above, if a special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) becomes a big hit, the first variable prize device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 have a 95% probability of the sixth variable prize device. Operates in an operating pattern. At this time, it is possible to almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the specially changed state (high probability state) of the special symbol, so that the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64). This is advantageous for the player as compared to a case of a jackpot. Therefore, in order to obtain a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), in the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player performs a right-handed game. Do.

  During the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol decreases (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the normal symbol hit increases (1). Second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is reached, the jackpot f (almost certainly shifts to the special symbol probable change state (high probability state)) It is easy for the player to easily acquire a large amount of prize balls, because the probability of the special symbol being easily changed is likely to be repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41 (b) is a first specific winning in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the sixth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 is controlled so as to be maintained, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the third round game R is started.

  In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the third round of round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the third round of the round game R is completed.

  When the round game R of the third round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, thereby obtaining the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the lapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and the solenoid is operated so as to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has elapsed. The driving of the 4852 is controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. The predetermined time is set as a time during which the ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the maximum speed, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is estimated normally that only about five balls can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round is completed only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in this operation pattern, in the interval immediately before the fourth round, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150. Therefore, since the storage channel 1231 is filled with approximately five winnings in three seconds, it is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity given to the player due to the shorter time of the round R in the fourth round than in other rounds. can do.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In the second opening time OP2, when the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of stored balls is up to six), all the discharged balls are in the probability variation determination channel 4820. When the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is seven or more (when the number of stored balls is seven or more), at least one of the discharged balls is used. The time is set to be shorter than the time when the sphere of the part passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  In the present embodiment, since the fourth round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, even if the fourth round game ends in the second operation time T2, The number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily increased to seven or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the ball remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the remaining ball can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, unlike the prior art, in the present operation pattern, in the fifth round of the round game R, it is not necessary to close the opening / closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation. In addition, the opening and closing plate 1300 can be operated without discomfort. Hereinafter, this will be described.

  In the related art, when a predetermined number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the operation of the distribution operation member 4581 starts, and the round game R ends, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. However, there is a risk that a ball may not be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the player may not be able to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state). In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the open / close plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 was closed before the operation (it was opened twice in one round).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since it is a game property that switches whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a can be made to enter the specific area 4830 by the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round. Even if the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. Since the ball heading for the specific area 4830 has already won the first variable prize device 4000, the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) without any problem.

  Therefore, in the present operation pattern, the opening and closing plate 1300 is opened so that the operation of the opening and closing plate 1300 can be performed even while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation in the fifth round of the round game R. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, it prevents a problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the winning pattern. can do.

  In addition, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R stays in the storage channel 1231 during the first operation time T1, so that the first ball is won in the fifth round game R. It is possible to prevent a ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination channel 4820 while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state. Thereby, the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) according to the mode of winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent a problem that whether or not it can be changed occurs.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot E, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as the sixth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, thereby obtaining the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) measures until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses, and the third opening time After the lapse of OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 seconds in the present embodiment), and the solenoid is operated so as to hold the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state again after the predetermined time has elapsed. The driving of the 4852 is controlled to cause the distribution operation member 4851 to operate for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass to the specific region 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which a specified number of balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, although it is possible to fire one ball at a time at an interval of 0.6 seconds at the maximum speed, it takes 6 seconds to fire the specified number of balls. That is, it is estimated normally that only about five balls can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a in three seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round is completed only in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T2.

  On the other hand, in the present operation pattern, in the interval immediately before the fourth round, ten balls (all spheres) are discharged from the discharge port 1150. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled with approximately five possible prizes in three seconds, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state with the sphere won in three seconds remaining in the storage channel 1231. .

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, since about five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fifth round game R, eight or more balls are ejected in three seconds for three seconds due to some rare causes. As long as the ball does not win 1000a, the distributing operation member 4851 is displaced after all the ejected balls have passed through the probability variation determination channel 4820.

  Therefore, when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, no ball remains in the probability variation determination channel 4820, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the open / close plate 1300 and the distributing member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in can be obtained.

  Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not the ball can be stored to near the fullness of the storage channel 1231 during the fourth round of the round game R. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high-probability state) of the special symbol, depending on the difference in how the ball is stored, so that the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231. Attention to the ball can be improved. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the first variable winning device 4000.

  Also, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter in the fourth round of the round game R, it is almost certain that the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) is obtained. Although it is possible, since the time of the round game R is short, the more the player is accustomed to the game, the more the player loses the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

  In other words, an unfamiliar player is easier to hit and play during a jackpot game, while a person who is more accustomed to the game is more likely to avoid hitting to avoid wasting balls between rounds during the jackpot and to make it easier to stop between rounds Is the difference resulting from

  More specifically, in the case of an open game, a plurality of balls always flow in the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300, and the ball is prized to the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. Because it occurs, if there are even three seconds, there is enough room for three or more balls to enter. Therefore, an unskilled player can acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) without any problem.

  On the other hand, in the case of starting the launch after the start of the fourth round of the round game R and performing the stop between the rounds so as to prevent the ball from flowing near the opening and closing plate 1300 during the interval period, the useless ball is certainly Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening and closing plate 1300 until a while after the start of the round game R of the fourth round (for example, two seconds have not elapsed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining one second, which makes it difficult to acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state). Therefore, even a player who is accustomed to the game can be encouraged to make a launch without hitting during the jackpot game.

  As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent risk that, depending on the mode of launching, a person who is more accustomed to the game may decrease the profit obtained. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or accustomed, the player can be encouraged to play the game without hitting the jackpot, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be secured.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, after grasping the above-mentioned risks, it is possible to provide a player who still stops between rounds with a jackpot game requiring concentration, which cannot be enjoyed by other pachinko machines 10. . That is, the number of useless balls is reduced by performing an inter-round hitting operation in which the ball is started backward by calculating backward so that the ball flows into the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round. Meanwhile, the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) can also be acquired. In this case, a stop between rounds is performed before the end of the third round game R, and a launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, it is necessary to perform a high-level calculation of starting the launch while predicting the timing of the ball entry while considering the randomness of the flow of the ball entering the ball during the third round game R. Therefore, if the timing at which the ball that has started launching reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning opening 1000a is as calculated, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42 (b) is a first specific winning in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of the jackpot F, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the round game R of the third round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fourth round is started.

  In the fourth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved to the open position. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fourth round, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round game R, and the fourth round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Is terminated by the passage of.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the lapse of the second opening time OP2, the distributing member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the distributing member 4851 is again moved. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time. Note that this opening operation is performed simultaneously with the opening operation due to the elapse of the third opening time OP3.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the ejected balls pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  In this operation pattern, since the fourth round game R is started with five balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the fourth round game R waits until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is seven or more, the distribution operation member 4851 may be opened with the balls remaining in the probability variation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be caused to flow down to the specific area 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the open / close plate 1300 and the distributing member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R is the same as the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in can be obtained.

<When operating in the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the third round of the round game R is the same as the above-described case of the big hit D, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The driving mode of the distribution device 4850 is similar to that of the eighth operation pattern.

  When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fourth round game R is started.

  In the fourth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is measured by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) elapses. After the third opening time OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is again moved to the open position. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the distributing operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round of the round game R ends.

  In this operation pattern, only five balls are ejected from the ejection port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round game R, and the fourth round game R is 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Is terminated by the passage of.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the fifth round (special round) round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distributing operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass to the specific region 4830.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round of the round game R continues at the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage). (When the number is seven or more), the time is set to be shorter than the time when at least some of the ejected balls pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

  In this operation pattern, the fourth round of the round game R is started in a state in which no balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the fourth round of the round game R, a specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to end the fourth round of the round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1. However, when the fourth round game R is completed without waiting for the maximum value of the first operation time T1 as in the case where the fourth round game R is ended by a predetermined number of winnings, in many cases, Immediately after that, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability variation determination channel 4820, and then the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced.

  On the other hand, when the distributing operation member 4851 ends the round game R of the fourth round until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is over, if seven or more balls are ejected in the interval immediately after that, The sphere can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not hurry to win the specified number of prizes, but makes the first specified winning opening 1000a win the specified number of balls immediately before the end of the fourth round of the round game R, so that the player has a special symbol. The right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) can be obtained.

  Also, as another method, by ending the fifth round of the round game R immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the ball ejected at the interval immediately after the fifth round of the round game R is stored in the specific area. By flowing down, the player can also acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable state (high probability state).

  As described above, according to the present operation pattern, at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, etc.), the player can change to the certain state of the special symbol (high probability state). Whether or not the right to transfer can be acquired can be made different.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the round game R of the fourth round is specified. When the operation time is specified (in the case of the eighth operation pattern), the player continues to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a so that the player can play the special symbol no matter how the game is played. The right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) can be acquired, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, when the operation time is not specified (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player himself / herself selects the operation time according to the game mode (when the specified number of balls are to be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a). In some cases), the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) may be acquired in some cases. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player a sense of excitement to acquire a probable change state by himself. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  The sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern are characterized in that the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is shorter than usual, and the fourth round of the round game with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231 is performed. When R is started, it is easy to obtain the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state). That is, when the number of award balls obtained in the round game R of the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a gaming property in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is set to such a length as to discharge the ball in the storage channel 1231 as a whole ball, the right to shift the special symbol to the certain change state (high probability state) is granted. Difficult to get. That is, in the case where it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, it is possible to realize the gaming property that the payout of the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game increases. Thereby, a large number of balls to be launched by the player in the normal state to be continued later can be prepared, so that the player's cash investment can be easily suppressed.

  These differences can be grasped at the start of the fourth round by whether or not balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, at the start of the fourth round of the round game R, the player predicts a state after the end of the big hit game. can do. Even in the case of an operation pattern in which it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the special symbol state (high-probability state), the right to shift to the special symbol transition state (high-probability state) depends on the manner of the ball entry. Can be obtained.

  Here, in the present embodiment, by forcing the player to make a selection, the concentration of the player during the jackpot game can be maintained. That is, the game mode in which it is easy to obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) is exactly the opposite.

  More specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the round game R of the fourth round, as many balls as possible are placed in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses. Winning a prize increases the possibility of acquiring the right to shift to a special symbol probable state (high probability state) (it is beneficial to win many balls from the start of the fourth round). In the case of the operation pattern of No. 9, in the round game R of the fourth round, a predetermined number of balls are awarded until the end of 30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and the period of the round game R is extended. As a result, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) is increased (it is advantageous to suppress the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

  As described above, the possibility of acquiring the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state) changes depending on how the ball is won in the round game R (the game mode selected by the player). Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to maintain the concentration on the game.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the tenth operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. Note that the processing up to the end of the fourth round of the round game R is the same as in the case of the above-described sixth operation pattern, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 second) between rounds elapses, and After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses. After the second opening time OP2 elapses, the distributing operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (about 0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the elapse of the predetermined time, the distributing operation member 4851 The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, so that the distribution operation member 4851 operates for a short time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  In the present operation pattern, since the opening operation of the distribution operation member 4851 after the lapse of the second opening time OP2 is performed for a short time, the ball cannot basically flow down to the specific area 4830.

  In addition, since the distribution operation member 4851 is opened during the round R of the fifth round, if the round game can be completed early, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. Although there is a possibility that the game will be performed (for example, when the operation after the lapse of the third opening time OP3 is long), in the present operation pattern, the fifth round of the round game R starts with the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the specified number of balls cannot be entered, and the fifth round game cannot be ended early. Therefore, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

  Then, when the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  In the present operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distributing operation member 4851 in the fifth round of the round game R has the same portions as those in the above-described sixth operation pattern. The same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of No. 6 can be obtained.

  Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the fourth round game R. Since the pattern of the other portions is the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

  The tenth operation pattern causes the ball to flow down to the specific area 4830 even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the fourth round of the round game R in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern. They differ in that they cannot.

  That is, by mixing this operation pattern, the player is not relieved even if the ball can be fully stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round of the game R, and the discharged ball is in the specific area. The user can be prompted to confirm whether to pass 4830 or not. That is, in the jackpot game, a stage (first step) of determining whether or not a ball can be stored in the storage channel 1231, and the distribution operation member 4851 operates before the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes. It is possible to focus on a different part for each stage, divided into the stage of whether or not (second step). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game unintentionally, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described where a pitch corresponding to the jackpot type can be acquired regardless of the progress of the game in the special symbol change state (high probability state). However, the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment is described. 5000 is provided with a pitch adjustment device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to obtain more pitches as the number of times of change until the jackpot is obtained in the special symbol change state (high probability state) is smaller. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 disposed near the lower right corner of the game board 13 includes a main body member 2100, a covered front plate 2200, In addition to the opening and closing plate 1300, the driving device 1500, and the regulating member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, An outgoing ball adjusting device 5900 that adjusts the outgoing ball by causing the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 to enter the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is mainly provided.

  The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 that extends downward from the lower end of the rotating tip 1421 of the extending portion 1420 along the shape of the rotating tip 1421.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the lower end of the time difference forming portion 5423 extends to a position where the time difference forming portion 5423 contacts the engaging portion 1333 of the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is not excited.

  In addition to the configuration described in the second embodiment, the second variable prize device 5800 is configured such that an interposed rod portion 5850 having a slightly added shape and a sliding operation in a vertical direction on the left side in rear view of the transmission rod portion 2860, By being pushed down by the branched portion of the interposed rod portion 5850 (the L-shaped portion in the rear view added to the configuration of the interposed rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment), the interposed rod portion 5850 is arranged so as to be in contact with the movable closing member 5931 of the pitching adjustment device 5900. A pressing action portion 5870 is provided.

  The outgoing ball adjusting device 5900 includes a flowing-down passage forming portion 5910 that allows a ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 to flow down, and a lower end portion of the flowing-down passage forming portion 5910 that penetrates the thin plate member 1100 of the main body member 2100 and stores the ball. A communication hole 5920 arranged in a manner (opening diameter, arrangement) in which a ball can flow into the flow path 1231 and an opening / closing member 5930 for opening and closing the communication hole 5920 in conjunction with driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are mainly provided. Prepare for. It should be noted that the flow-down path forming portion 5910 is disposed in a manner to pass through the back side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, and is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. Also, illustration of the intermediate portion is omitted.

  The flow-down path forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path through which the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 flows down. The opening at the lower end is arranged to face the communication hole 5920, and the ball is transferred to the communication hole 5920. The adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in, and the number of balls stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceeds the specified number (30 in the present embodiment), and then enters the second ball entrance 640. And a surplus sphere discharge channel 5915 for discharging the collected spheres to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The adjustment flow channel 5911 is formed as a deceleration flow channel 5912 formed as a reverse U-shaped flow channel that is curved by a half turn near the lower end, and a second ball entrance 640 is formed from the upper end of the deceleration flow channel 5912. And a falling channel 5913 extending vertically in the rearward direction.

  Due to the shape of the deceleration flow path 5912, the load of the sphere discharged from the communication hole 5920 in the opening direction of the communication hole 5920 from the subsequent sphere stagnating in the deceleration flow path 5912 is reduced irrespective of the number of stagnation balls. be able to. In other words, when the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the own weight of the subsequent ball from the subsequent ball, the deceleration flow path 5912 assumes that the inclination near the communication hole 5920 is gentle (inclination close to horizontal). Therefore, the effect of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, regardless of the number of stagnation balls, the speed at which the sphere immediately before the communication hole 5920 is discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the sphere to the opening / closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

  Since the falling channel 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the falling sphere does not receive deceleration and falls freely. Therefore, when a ball continues to enter the second entrance 640 and enters the ball, the preceding ball is decelerated earlier than the subsequent ball, and impedes the flow of the subsequent ball. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the surplus sphere discharge channel 5915.

  In the present embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the balls to stay in order from just before the communication hole 5920, and when the number of the staying balls reaches 30, the upper end of the 30th ball becomes the excess ball discharge flow path 5915. The flow path length is designed to be above the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the ball after the 31st ball enters the surplus sphere discharge channel 5915. In other words, up to 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the high probability state of 30 rotations. During this time, the ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640, and the player can proceed with the game by a right-handed game, thereby aiming for the next jackpot acquisition while suppressing ball loss. On the other hand, since the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 enters the adjustment channel 5911, the ball stays in the adjustment channel 5911 from the start of the high-probability state to the end of the high-probability state. The sphere increases.

  The opening / closing member 5930 is arranged at a position protruding inside the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are not excited, and closes the opening below the outer shape of the sphere, while one of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is excited. Accordingly, the movable closing member 5931 disposed at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, the movable closing member 5931 is connected to the distal end member 1520 of the driving device 1500, and is movable in the left-right direction with the driving of the solenoid 1510. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110; and a slide rail portion 5933 provided at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 so as to be vertically movable relative to the connecting rod portion 5932. One end of the connecting rod portion 5932 is provided to apply an upward urging force to the movable closing member 5931. An elastic spring 5934, mainly comprising.

  FIGS. 46A and 46B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 along the line XLVI-XLVI in FIG. FIG. 46A illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is opened, and FIG. 46B illustrates a state in which the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and the sphere flows into the storage channel 1231 from the communication hole 5920 and can stay there, the third ball AP53 flows into the storage channel 1231. The fourth ball AP54 is kept at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920.

  In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) having passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a in this state flows into the storage channel 1231. The space for the ball AP 54 held at a position where the ball AP 54 does not fall out of the 5920 to enter the storage channel 1231 is filled with the flowed ball IP 51. Therefore, the ball retained at a position where it does not escape from the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 and is maintained at the same position.

  As shown in FIG. 46B, as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the restricting member 2600 changes to the discharge state, the movable closing member 5931 moves from the overhang adjustment flow channel 5911 to the storage flow channel 1231. Ball inflow is regulated.

  When the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 is completed, the state is switched again to the state shown in FIG. 46A, and the sphere AP54, which has been retained at a position where it has not been removed from the communication hole 5920, becomes the top and the third sphere The ball up to flows into the storage channel 1231.

  In the jackpot game, the inflow of the sphere from the adjustment flow channel 5911 to the storage flow channel 1231 is repeated as described above, and the inflow is regulated at a maximum of three times per one opening of the communication hole 5920. You.

  With reference to FIG. 47, a case where the jackpot game proceeds by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. FIGS. 47A to 47C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 47 (a) to 47 (c), the operations of the opening / closing plate 1300, the regulating member 2600, and the opening / closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

  In FIG. 47 (a), the state where the solenoid 1510 is excited is shown. In FIG. 47 (b), the excitation of the solenoid 1510 is released and the tip of the time difference forming section 5423 is on the rear side of the engaging section 1333 of the opening / closing plate 1300 (see FIG. FIG. 47 (c) illustrates a state in which the time lag forming portion 5423 is disposed above the engagement portion 1333, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the communication hole 5920 is opened when the solenoid 1510 is excited, so that the ball can pass.

  When the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) changes to the state shown in FIG. 47 (b), the movable closing member 5931 moves along with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920, while engaging the opening / closing plate 1300. The portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction, and the movement of the open / close plate 1300 is regulated, so that the regulating member 2600 maintains the stored state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47 (c), the regulating member 2600 is in the discharging state, and the balls staying in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, in driving the solenoid 1510, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 is started. Balls can be prevented from flowing from 5911.

  FIGS. 48A and 48B are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. FIG. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the operation of the regulating member 2600 and the opening / closing member 5930 by the driving of the solenoid 2810 is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 48A illustrates a state where the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 are not excited, and FIG. 48B illustrates a state where the solenoid 2810 is excited.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the movable closing member 5931 is pushed down by the pressing action portion 5870, so that the communication hole 5920 is opened. This allows the sphere to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the urging force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

  Accordingly, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened and the ball can flow into the storage channel 1231 while the communication hole 5920 is de-energized. It is closed and the inflow into the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

  In the big hit game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are driven and controlled by the above-described mechanism, a fixed number (three in the present embodiment) of balls are flown into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of, for example, 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes With a probability of 1, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, and the special symbol lottery 30 times It is configured to be set to the normal state after termination. In the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased, so that the ball can easily win the second entrance 640.

  In this embodiment, three types of special symbols, "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i", are provided (see FIG. 49). Although details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a are differently configured depending on the jackpot type, so that the number of balls that enter the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Be composed.

  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit types in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining a big hit type is stored. It is defined in association with the type of the entrance that triggered the symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”. Is associated with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

  In the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", and the big hit h Are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

  When the jackpot H or the jackpot h is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can receive the payout of approximately 2250 prize balls, can win the specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive the payout of the specified upper limit.

  In the case of a special game 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the big hit i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

  When the big hit i is reached, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the payout number of the prize balls and the time required for the jackpot game are made variable depending on the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is obtained.

  In other words, when a special pattern 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), a specified number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big hit, In the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 2 (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), according to the number of balls in the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is obtained, a prize ball is obtained. Since the maximum number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the gaming ability of acquiring a jackpot in a right-handed game is different from the gaming ability of paying out prize balls depending on when the jackpot of the right-handed game occurs. Sex can be added. This makes it possible to prevent the right-handed game from being played indiscriminately, and it is possible to improve the attention to each change.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50 (b) is a diagram showing the time change in the twelfth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 1 specific winning opening 1000a and 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the eleventh operation pattern>
If the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot H or jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the winning is satisfied, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a by displacing the slide plate 2840 to the closed state, and the first round of the round game R ends.

  In the first round of the round game R, the communication hole 5920 is opened with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, and a maximum of three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48). When storing the spheres from the second storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, 13 balls can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, so that how many (1 to 1) spheres flow from the communication hole 5920 can be stored. Even if it is 3), the round game R can be ended by winning the specified number (10C).

  When the round game R of the first round is completed, the timer means sets the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. , And after the third interval time Int3 between rounds has elapsed, the second round game R is started. Here, a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150 at intervals of 3 seconds, so that at the end of the first round of the round game R, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251 Spheres (up to 14 spheres) that can be stored in a row can be discharged globally.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the second specification. The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 operates for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The drive of the solenoid 2810 is controlled so that the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the round game R of the second round is completed.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round games R of the third round up to the fifteenth round are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int3 interposed between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is closed and opened. And the solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 2810 controls the driving of the solenoid 2810 so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  According to this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 from the adjustment channel 5911 every time the solenoid 2810 is driven (excited). Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the entire sphere is stored until the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the tenth round game R). Since the ball can enter the road 1231, the big hit game can be ended without the ball remaining in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating in the twelfth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot i, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 keeps the opening / closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810 is controlled so that the round game R of the first round is started after the opening time OP has elapsed. The operation up to the fourth round of the round game R is the same as that of the eleventh operation pattern, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between the rounds elapses. After the elapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

  In the fifth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. To control the opening and closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fifth round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round of the round game R ends.

  Here, although it is possible for the ball to flow from the through hole 5920 even in the round game R of the fifth round, unlike the fourth round, the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the balls are actually flown from the through holes 5920, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Therefore, the number of prize balls obtained in the fifth round of the round game R of the present operation pattern is smaller than the number of prize balls obtained in the same round game R in the eleventh operation pattern, and the first prize ball is obtained. Since the end of the round game R is to be waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the big hit game is prolonged.

  Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the sixth to fifteenth rounds is repeated with the third interval time Int3 between the rounds between each round game R, and the open / close plate 1300 is switched between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

  When the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid means 1510 controls the driving of the solenoid 1510 so that the timer means keeps the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time between rounds Int3 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

  In the present operation pattern, the decrease in the number of award balls that can occur in the subsequent round game R from the fifth round game R and the extension of the round time mean that a ball flows from the through hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231. Depending on the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the start of the big hit, the degree to which the number of winning balls decreases and the round time is extended changes. The number of spheres remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of spheres passing through the second entrance 640, while the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the second entrance) 640), the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 is related to the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2.

  In the following description, in the present operation pattern, the number of times of the lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (the lottery based on the ball entering the second entrance 640) and the number of the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Are described assuming that they have the same number.

  As described above, in the jackpot game of the present operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a once. That is, up to twelve balls have already flowed into the storage channel 1231 before the fourth round of the round game R. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the ball flows into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 because the jackpot game is started with 13 or more balls stored in the adjustment channel 5911. Is the case. In other words, this is a case where the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) has been received 13 times or more after the transition to the high probability state. .

  Therefore, if the jackpot is obtained between the transition to the high probability state and the reception of the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry to the second entrance 640) 12 times, the number of award balls decreases. And the extension of the round time does not occur, so that the player's attention to acquiring the jackpot by the 12th lottery can be improved.

  In addition, even after the thirteenth lottery, the number of prize balls decreases for each one lottery, and the round time is extended for each three lotteries. Attention can be improved.

  That is, for example, when a jackpot is acquired in a state where 14 balls remain in the adjustment channel 5911 (the 14th lottery of the special symbol 2), the ball is stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the flow channel 1231 is two, the number that can be won in this round is eight. When a jackpot is won in a state where 15 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the 15th lottery of the special symbol 2), the storage flow path passes through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round of the round game R. Since the number of balls flowing into the 1231 is three, the number that can be won in this round is seven. Therefore, as the number of remaining balls increases, the number of prize balls paid out in the fifth round of round R decreases.

  On the other hand, in the case where the jackpot is won in the thirteenth to fifteenth lotteries, in any case, the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 flows into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R. Is zero. Therefore, from the sixth round game R, a specified number of balls can be made to win in the first specific winning opening 1000a, thereby completing the sixth round game R. No change occurs in the degree of extension.

  In addition, when the number of remaining adjustment channels 5911 when the jackpot is acquired is 16 to 18, in the round game R of the sixth round, and when 19 to 21, the number of adjustment channels 5911 is 22 to 24 in the round game R of the seventh round. In the number of rounds, the number of prize balls decreases in the round game R of the eighth round, in the round game R of the ninth round, in the case of 25 to 27, in the round game R of the ninth round, and in the round game R of the tenth round, in the case of 28 to 30. And the round time is prolonged.

  Thereby, as in the present embodiment, in the gaming property in which the high-probability state ends with the number of lotteries, in the case where the jackpot is acquired shortly after the transition to the high-probability state, and in the case where the jackpot is acquired just before the end of the high-probability state. Thus, it is possible to make a difference in the profit (number of payouts of prize balls, progress time of the jackpot game, etc.) given to the player.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, since the profit given to the player is reduced as the number of lotteries from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot acquisition is increased, if the number of lotteries until the jackpot acquisition is small, Originally, there should have been a chance to receive a lottery with a high probability even with the remaining number of lotteries, but it is possible to partially eliminate the player's dissatisfaction that the lottery cannot be received.

  In other words, if the jackpot was won in the first lottery after the high probability state was reached, the remaining 29 lotteries should be added and the next 59 lotteries could be received. In fact, the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the high-probability state after the end of the jackpot game is limited to 30 times again can be partially solved. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

  In addition, even in the high probability state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64), the second specific winning port 2255a is set in the eleventh operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout irrespective of the number of lotteries after opening and closing and shifting to the high probability state. Therefore, the player may play a game (left-handed game) aiming at winning the ball in the first entrance 64 in the high probability state.

  In this case, as compared with the case of performing a right-handed game, the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 is increased without leading to the special symbol lottery, the interval at which the lottery can be received becomes longer, and the game time becomes longer. May be longer.

  Therefore, as a method of playing in the high-probability state, the player may be able to receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time while suppressing the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is obtained. Do you aim for the jackpot of jackpot h) (whether you play a right-handed game) or increase the number of balls ejected from the first out port 66 until the jackpot is acquired, and expect that the game time will be longer, It is possible to appropriately select whether to aim for a jackpot of a jackpot type (jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of a decrease in the prize ball in (a left-handed game). As a result, it is possible to widen the range of the game method to be selected depending on the player's taste and the situation where the player is placed (playable time or the like).

  After the high probability state ends, the second entrance 640 becomes difficult to open, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of balls will remain in the adjustment channel 5911, but in the case of the jackpot type (big hit H) that can be obtained in the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by the specified number of prizes, the profit given to the player (the profit in both the number of prize balls and the game time) is not impaired. Therefore, even when the player stops playing the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being lost. A player can start a game at an arbitrary timing.

  In the present embodiment, the number of lotteries of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (the lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) and the number of the balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 (the second entry ball) The description has been made assuming that the number of balls entering the mouth 640) is the same. However, in an actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the time of obtaining the jackpot is the number of balls of the special symbol 2 until the jackpot is obtained. It should be noted that the number of lotteries is rarely the same.

  That is, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed when a ball is won at the second entrance 640, and the player recognizes whether or not the lottery has won the jackpot in the subsequent reach production or , After a button press effect, etc., it is normal for the player to continue to hit the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since up to four balls can be held in the second entrance 640, a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player receives a lottery efficiently, a so-called hold stop) In this case, the player keeps the state in which a maximum of about four balls enter the second entrance 640 in addition to the number of lotteries in which the player can recognize the jackpot determination.

  Also, even if the ball enters the second entrance 640 when the number of reserves is the maximum, the lottery cannot be received, but the ball enters the adjustment channel 5911, so that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is reduced. More likely to decrease. The hold is digested by stopping the change and starting the next change, in other words, the longer the period until the stop of the change, the higher the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game decreases. Will be.

  Therefore, when the ball is left open in an effect with a high sense of expectation such as a long reach, it is possible to form a gaming property in which the possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game is reduced is increased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during a high-reliability production such as a long reach, so that the player can concentrate on adjusting the firing power of the ball, eliminating the concentration power can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve a player's concentration on an effect such as a long reach, and it is possible to improve attention to the effect.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position has been described. However, the first variable winning device 6000 according to the sixth embodiment interferes with the balls by driving. Thus, the arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, below the first variable prize device 6000 in the present embodiment, the probability variation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is disposed, and the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 is placed in the specific area 4830. The state after the jackpot game is changed depending on whether or not the game passes.

  FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 along the line LII-LII in FIG. FIG. 52 shows the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (the main body member 1100, the covering member 1200, the open / close plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the driving device 1500, the regulating member 1600, and the like). In addition to including the rear cover 1700), an interference device 6900 newly introduced in the sixth embodiment is provided.

  The interference device 6900 is provided with a solenoid 6910 disposed on the back side of the main body member 1100 and having a movable slide axis disposed along a plane that is flat with the surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and a tip of the movable portion of the solenoid 6910. A main member 6920 is mainly provided with an interference member 6930 that is slid in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the front member 6920.

  The tip member 6920 includes a long hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The long hole 6921 is formed to be inclined in such a manner as to be closer to the thin plate member 1110 toward the distal end side of the distal end member 6920.

  The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by a through hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 arranged to face the storage channel 1231 of the covered front plate 1200, and the rear end portion is a long hole 6921. The rear end moves back and forth along the long hole 6921 with the driving of the solenoid 6910. By this back and forth operation, it is possible to enter the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

  The through hole H61 is provided at a position slightly separated to the left from the center of the third ball P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. When the interference member 6930 slides forward from the through hole H61 to be in a protruding state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), the ball P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231.

  FIGS. 53A and 53B are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. FIG. Note that FIG. 53A illustrates a case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53B illustrates a case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. The sphere that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is shown by an imaginary line, and “V” is described in the sphere that first enters the specific region 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later. .

  As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, ten balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 when the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, while the third ball is stored when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. Subsequent balls are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231, and the number of stored balls is less than 10 balls. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the specified number of the big hit games per round game R is 10, if the interference member 6930 is in the overhanging state, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be ended due to the specified number of winnings, the end of the round game R is waited until the specified time. The effect that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (probable change state of the special symbol), for example, a quarter With a probability of 1, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the end of the jackpot game, a special symbol probable state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends ten times, and the special symbol lottery is performed ten times. When the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 after the game is over, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830, the game is normally performed until the special symbol lottery is completed 10 times after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to be in the time saving state of the symbol.

  In the present embodiment, two types of special symbols such as “big hit I” and “big hit j” are provided. Although details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the jackpot type, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 6000, The special symbol is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state).

  More specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). . When the big hit I is reached, the big hit game of two rounds is executed in the thirteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive payout of approximately 285 prize balls and cannot almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state).

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is selected by lottery (a lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), a jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

  In the case of the jackpot j, the jackpot game of two rounds is executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probable change state (high probability state).

  As described above, when a special symbol 2 is drawn by a lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the second entrance 640), the right to shift the special symbol to a probable state (high probability state) is almost surely acquired. This is advantageous to the player as compared with a case where a big win is achieved in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the ball entering the first entrance 64). Therefore, in order to obtain a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entry into the second entrance 640), in the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player performs a right-handed game. Do.

  During the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol decreases (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of the normal symbol hit increases (1). Second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and the lottery of the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the probable change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is hit, the jackpot j is almost completely shifted to the probable change state of the special symbol (high probability state). It is easy for the player to easily acquire a large amount of prize balls because the special symbol that becomes the jackpot that can acquire the right) is easily repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54 (b) is a first specific winning in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

  In FIG. 54, in order to facilitate identification, the first interval time Int1 between rounds is described ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long-term operation time TL). Is done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the length of each time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the length of each time is performed based on the time relationship described below.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the determined type of big hit game after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described.

<When operating in the thirteenth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is the jackpot game of jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). Then, the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The drive of the solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, and the distributing operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the protruding state by the long-term operation time TL, and after the lapse of the long-term operation time TL, the solenoid 6910 is driven to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again. By controlling, the interference member 6930 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, a specified number of balls cannot be won in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53 (b)). In the present embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1, so that the interference member 6930 is first waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1 is reached. Is in a retracted state, so that it is practically impossible to win a specified number of balls, and the first round of the round game R ends when the first operation time T1 elapses.

  Simultaneously with the end of the first round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retreat state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot pass through to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the certain symbol change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to maintain the retraction state, respectively, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

<When operating in the fourteenth operation pattern>
In the case of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 so that the opening / closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

  When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). Then, the solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, respectively, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and at the same time, the solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to displace the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state and open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. After the elapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved. The drive of the solenoid 4852 is controlled so as to maintain the closed state again, and the distributing operation member 4851 operates for a long time.

  When the MPU 201 displaces the open / close plate 1300 from the closed state to the open state, the timer means (not shown) holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) elapses. Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the protruding state for a very short time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after the lapse of the very short time, the interference member 6930 is again held in the retracted state. The solenoid 6910 is driven and controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls is used. When the (winning) is satisfied, the open / close plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a very short time, it is in the retracted state most of the time, so as shown in FIG. Balls can be awarded. Therefore, while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the opening / closing member 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the ball can be discharged toward the probability variation determination flow path 4820. It can flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special symbol change state (high probability state).

  When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means controls the drive of the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the open / close plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. After the elapse of the first interval time Int1, the second round game R is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the open / close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to perform the first specification. The drive of the solenoid 1510 is controlled so as to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening and closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the opening / closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round R is completed.

  When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means closes the opening / closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to maintain the retraction state, respectively, and the big hit game ends as the time elapses.

  Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time at which it is expected that the winning number of balls will be 3 or more and less than 6 in the first round of the round game R. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the ball stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball blocks the line of sight of the player, and it is difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This makes it difficult for the player to check the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

  Therefore, the change due to the overhang of the interference member 6930 is limited to the third and subsequent balls moving only slightly in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the player recognizes whether or not the change by the interference member 6930 has occurred. It is possible to make the player enjoy the game of making the first specific winning opening 1000a win a ball and storing the ball in the storage channel 1231 without giving a sense of incongruity to the player by the operation of the interference member 6930. Can be.

  Then, the balls are stored near the entrance of the storage channel 1231, and yet the first round of the round game R is not completed, giving a sense of incongruity for the first time, and causing the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to be actually counted. For the first time, it is possible to form a new game characteristic of recognizing a difference in a jackpot type.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the situation (change in the state of the interference member 6930) visually recognized through the game board 13, and the player can be operated by the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify a change in the situation of the game board 13 from the given discomfort in an easily recognizable manner, and to make the player recognize the difference in the jackpot type. Therefore, attention to the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the open / close plate 1300 is in the closed state, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment is different from the third embodiment. The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured such that the ball disposed at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 when the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. It is a partial sectional view of the 1st variable winning device 7000 in the line corresponding to the line. The configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment except for the covering front plate 7200, and thus the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same configuration as the configuration described in the third embodiment (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the accommodation portion 1230, the detection sensor 1240, and the drop delay plate 3250). In addition to the above, a second drop delay plate 7260 newly provided in the present embodiment is provided.

  The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member extending between the terminal surface 3251b and the accommodation portion 1230 and extending to the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and descends as the upper surface 7261 separates from the detection sensor 1240. Incline. As shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 extends rearward so as not to interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening / closing plate 1300.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the second drop delay plate 7260 has a distance between the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 near the detection sensor 1240 less than the diameter of the sphere and a position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance between the thin plate member 1110 and the front side wall surface is smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) with respect to the movement trajectory of the sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250. That is, it does not act on the ball rolling the rolling arc portion 3252. That is, the second drop delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member that changes whether or not it comes into contact with the ball according to the path of the ball. This will be described below.

  FIGS. 58A and 58B are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35B. FIG. 58 (a) illustrates a case where the open / close plate 1300 changes to a closed state in a state where the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, and FIG. 58 (b) illustrates a case where the open / close plate 1300 is closed. The case where the ball rolls toward the drop position Pf3 in the meantime is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the ball is disposed near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the ball is placed on the front plate in accordance with the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 generated during the operation of the opening / closing plate 1300. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, it comes into contact with the second drop delay plate 7260 in the process of falling, flows down to the drop delay plate 3250 side along the slope of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 to fall again to the drop position Pf3. To reach.

  Since the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (the distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening and closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball, the force of the ball Is large, it is possible to prevent the ball from vertically falling on the back side of the second drop delay plate 7260.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the sphere rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening and closing plate 1300 moves along the rearward slope of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250 toward the main body member 3100. It flows down while contacting with.

  At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the ball is disposed below the second drop delay plate 7260, the length of the second drop delay plate 7260 extended to the back side is determined by the movement trajectory of the ball. The ball falling from above can be received by the upper surface 7261 while also being held on the front side.

  The sphere rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second fall delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and falls directly after reaching the fall position Pf3. Therefore, similarly to the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250 without delay.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the ball receives the action of the second drop delay plate 7260 and the case where the ball does not receive the ball, depending on from where the ball approaches the second drop delay plate 7260.

  In the present embodiment, while maintaining the action of smoothly dropping the ball rolling the drop delay plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, the two balls are continuously rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 1300, and the previous ball is rolled. Even if the opening / closing plate 1300 is closed by passing through the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the fall of the ball disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

  In addition, even if two balls are not connected in a row, the ball that rolled on the upper surface of the open / close plate 1300 happens to be closed when the ball is accidentally placed in front of the detection sensor 1240. Also, the ball can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the sphere rolls leftward on the upper surface 7261 of the second fall delay plate 7260, and then resumes rightward rolling along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the fall delay plate 3250.

  Therefore, the ball can be maintained substantially in front of the opening and closing plate 1300 for a time longer than the time when the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 1300 is rolled. Thus, the number of useless balls (balls flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300 and discharged from the first out port 66) that can occur during the interval time can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port regulating member that opens and closes the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You may do it. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged without strictly controlling the operation length of the second discharge port regulating member. Therefore, the number of discharged balls can be changed between the case where the balls are discharged from the first discharge port and the case where the balls are discharged from the second discharge port. In this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be simultaneously opened, the time required for discharging the ball as a whole can be reduced, and the interval can be reduced.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening / closing plate 1300 rotates is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 that moves up and down can guide the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the upper position, and can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a when it is arranged at the lower position. May be deviated. In this case, when the ball is raised, it is not necessary to arrange the ball at a position sandwiched between the opening / closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200, so that the ball can be lifted more smoothly.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged from the single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional outlet may be arranged at a position midway in the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed depending on whether to discharge from the discharge port 1710 or to discharge from the additional discharge port. That is, it is difficult to discharge the ball clogged on the discharge port 1710 side from the additional discharge port. In addition, by discharging both of the discharge ports at the same time, the discharge efficiency of the ball can be increased, and the interval can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability variation determination unit 4800 starts operation based on the operation timing of the open / close plate 1300 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the sphere according to the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination channel 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be acquired depending on the number of ejected balls regardless of the ejection speed (interval) of the balls.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation start timing of the opening / closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly deviated has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation may be started at the same time. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resistance of the ball entering the ball changes depending on whether there is a gap in which the ball enters the storage channel 1231 (whether the storage channel 1231 is in the full state), It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that a predetermined sphere entering the storage channel 1231 is decelerated depending on whether or not the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is nearly full. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of round games R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, winning more than the specified number can be suppressed. Further, in this case, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being prolonged while suppressing winnings of a specified number or more, as compared to the case where the ball is decelerated regardless of the stored number. In addition, not only deceleration but also acceleration may be performed. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than a predetermined number of winnings.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the ball is stored in the storage channel 1231 so that the stored ball restricts the ball from entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electrically driven member may be provided that operates by a predetermined amount when a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a passes and that facilitates regulating the ball from entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the interval between rounds can be reduced as compared with the case where the stored balls are discharged at one time.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the specified number of balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specified number of +1 balls may be stored. In this case, the number of balls passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a exceeding the specified number can be limited to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, for each round, the round in which the eleventh ball easily passes and the round in which the eleventh ball is restricted from passing may be switched.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening and closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held (falls) at a position in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that two balls are not won simultaneously. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one ball may be held, so that the ball may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a until the open / close plate 1300 is closed. Alternatively, the possibility of this possibility may be switched for each round.

  In the second embodiment, the storage channel 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage channel, and the storage channel may be a channel that branches off toward the outlet on the way. In this case, a predetermined number of spheres can be left in the storage channel 1231 regardless of which outlet the sphere is discharged from.

  In the second embodiment described above, the case where the number of storable balls when entering the ball from the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game, It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of balls that can be stored when the ball enters from the first specific winning opening 1000a is less than the prescribed winning number (count number) in the round game R, and the number of balls that can be stored when the ball enters from the second specific winning opening 2255a. May be equal to or more than the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to configure a gaming property in which, when the ball is ejected from the first specific winning opening 1000a while the ball is ejected every time at the interval between rounds, the round time is necessarily extended.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the ball that has flowed below the opening / closing plate 1300 is lifted again above the opening / closing plate 1300 by the opening / closing plate 1300 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may be lifted by a movable member having a constant operation capable of picking up the ball. In this case, the player can be entertained by the movement of the ball.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (the drop delay plate 3250) is provided below the open / close plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib projecting from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be provided above the opening / closing plate 1300. When the sliding plate 1300 is in the open state, the ball may not contact the rib, and when in the closed state, the ball may contact the rib. Thus, even above the opening and closing plate 1300, the flow speed of the ball can be changed to delay the flow.

  As a method of preventing the ball from abutting on the rib, the ball may be moved to the front or rear by tilting in the front-rear direction, and the rib may be provided on the opposite side.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the falling of the ball is delayed by the drop delay plate 3250 arranged on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening / closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be constituted by a flow path curved through the back side of the opening / closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that once passes through the entrance from the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and flows down the back side of the opening and closing plate 1300 and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player by the opening and closing plate 1300 is discharged again from the exit. Can be performed by the falling of the ball, and the area for delaying the ball is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening and closing plate 1300. Therefore, even when the interval is long, the ball is delayed until the next round is started. A sufficient section can be secured.

  Note that the entrance is preferably below the opening and closing plate 1300, and the exit is preferably above the opening and closing plate 1300. When the opening / closing plate 1300 is in the open state, it is desirable that the opening of the entrance is narrowed by a part of the opening / closing plate 1300 to such an extent that the passage of a ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening and closing plate 1300 can prevent the ball from entering the entrance when the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extension plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side has been described. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extension plate portion 3251 may be configured to become gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of the gravitational acceleration in the flowing direction of the sphere becomes small, and the sphere can be decelerated.

  The change in acceleration / deceleration may be reversed. In the case where the ball accelerates toward the downstream, it is possible to prevent the formation of an open ball on the drop delay plate 3250.

  In the third embodiment, the case where only the ball that has passed below the opening and closing plate 1300 abuts on the opening and closing plate 1300 by arranging the drop delay plate 3250 below the opening and closing plate 1300 has been described. It is not limited to. For example, in a mode in which a ball slides in a pocket where a winning opening is arranged in an open state and a ball rolls on an upper surface of the open / close plate in a closed state, the rolling ball is opened and closed by a front and rear slide type opening and closing plate. A rib that can contact when reaching the downstream side on the plate may be arranged. A ball that directly enters the pocket does not come into contact with this rib. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the open / close plate in the closed state, it is possible to prevent the ball from moving up and down with the operation of the open / close plate.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the formation of the fall delay plate 3250 at the fall position Pf3 is omitted and the ball falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the drop delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, and a through-hole through which the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 to the right is formed, and the ball is discharged from the through-hole. You may make it. In this case, even when the open / close plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is disposed immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be disposed above the open / close plate 1300.

  This is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the fall delay plate 3250 is extended to a position passing through the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the sphere that has fallen at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and lands on the fall delay plate 3250 remains rightward (detection sensor). The ball that has fallen to the second fall delay plate 7260 by the same fall, once falls to the left (to the side away from the detection sensor 1240), and then falls again to the fall delay plate 3250. To reach. That is, the period in which the flow of the sphere is delayed below the opening / closing plate 1300 and the path along which the sphere flows are different.

  In the fifth embodiment described above, a case is described in which the flow paths in which the balls flowing from the second ball entrance 640 and the specific winning ports 1000a and 2255a flow down to the storage channel 1231 and the number of entered balls is related. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sphere may be automatically supplied to the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which a ball remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

  In the fifth embodiment, in the high probability state, the case where the number of lotteries until the jackpot is obtained decreases as the profit obtained by the player decreases, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the greater the number of lotteries up to the jackpot, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. In this case, the profit obtained by the jackpot obtained in a short time is small, and the profit obtained by the jackpot obtained in a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency with respect to the profit obtained by the player can be made uniform.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 to change the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an operation member that operates in the storage channel 1231 in accordance with the stored number and changes the number of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 may be provided. In this case, regardless of the drive timing of the drive device 1500, the operation members move according to the stored number, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the operation timing of the operation members is different from normal.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming an overhanging state, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a portion (particularly, a U-shaped portion) forming the storage channel 1231 moves in the extending direction (left-right direction) of the channel to change the length of the storage channel 1231. May be. In this case, even if the player has moved in advance, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice whether or not the player has moved because of the small movement amount. Therefore, it is possible to form a playability in which the player notices the movement of the member (change in the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) only after the ball is stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable prize device 6000 can be increased. Can be improved.

  The movement of the member may be performed by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the switching of the movement may or may not be performed by the driving device, and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 projects in a state where a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an overhang state may be formed before the ball starts to enter the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be seven. In addition, a pattern that forms a protruding state after the ball is stored and a pattern that forms a protruding state before the ball starts entering the storage channel 1231 may be mixed in each round. In this case, a single member can be used to switch between a round in which the storage number is seven and a round in which the storage number is nine.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be changed to a protruding state while the sphere is being discharged from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing at which the ball is ejected and the timing at which the interference member 6930 is brought into the extended state, the ejection mode of the ball can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points not to win more than the target number>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. And a ball entry preventing unit that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the entrance when a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance in a predetermined period by the detection unit. Machine A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly and vigorously on the operating member, an extra ball is required between the start of the operation of the operating member and the drop of the ball from the operating member. However, there is a possibility that more than a predetermined number of balls may pass through the detection port because there is a possibility of passing through the detection port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the ball entry prevention means can make it difficult for the predetermined number or more balls to pass through the detection means. Therefore, irrespective of the magnitude of the momentum of the ball in the state arranged on the upstream side of the entrance, the ease of passage of the ball when passing through the entrance is determined by comparing a predetermined number of balls with a predetermined number of balls. It can be changed with subsequent spheres. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port.

  In addition, as the ball entry preventing means, means for changing the ease of passage of the ball in accordance with the detection result of the detecting means, means for constantly maintaining the ease of passage of the ball in the ball entrance, etc. Is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A1, the ball entry preventing means includes: a container for accommodating the ball passing through the ball entrance; an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits the container; A first state in which the ball can pass therethrough, and a discharge switching unit that is switched in a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, wherein the storage unit is provided between the entrance port and the discharge port. A game machine A2 characterized by being formed with a volume that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, the accommodation means is formed with a capacity for accommodating a maximum of a predetermined number of balls between the entrance port and the exit port. When the balls are stored in the storage means while the means are maintained in the second state, the balls stored in the storage means can prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the predetermined number or more balls from passing through the entrance.

  In the gaming machine A2, the entering ball switching means is formed so as to be maintained in the second state while the discharge switching means is in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the accommodation means from the entrance while the ball is being ejected from the accommodation means. The operation timings of the discharge switching unit and the incoming ball switching unit may be simultaneous or different.

  The gaming machine A4, wherein the gaming machine A2 or A3 is provided with a driving unit which is also used as the discharge switching unit and the incoming ball switching unit.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the combined driving means. Thereby, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, after the incoming ball switching means starts changing the state from the second state to the first state, the discharge switching means moves from the first state to the first state. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that a state change is started in a state in which the state change is started toward two states, and the state changes are completed almost simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the accommodation means from being ejected from the ejection port after the entrance switching means is in the first state. While preventing (while preventing irregular winning), the ball switching device can be started to operate from the second state before the ball is discharged from the discharge port, so that the discharge from the discharge port is performed. As compared with the case where the operation of the ball-input switching means is started after the completion of the game, the number of balls flowing through the game area and passing through the ball-input switching means toward the out port can be reduced.

  The order of the state change may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching unit, or a dedicated driving unit may be provided for each switching unit to control the timing. May be.

  A gaming machine A6, wherein any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5 includes a changing means for changing the maximum number of the housing means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the maximum number of accommodation units can be changed by the changing unit, so that the predetermined number is temporarily (for example, in a specific round). A state in which more balls than the number are accommodated in the accommodation means can be formed. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to reconfigure a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of numerical values are changed by using accommodating means having the same shape (it is possible to cope with a difference in specifications). As a result, development costs can be reduced as compared with the case where a shape is created for each specification.

  In the gaming machine A6, the entrance is connected to the first entrance and the storage means downstream of the first entrance, so that the ball flowing down the game area can pass therethrough. And a second entrance where the passage is switched by the entrance switching means, wherein a ball enters the accommodation means from the first entrance and the accommodation from the second entrance. In the case where the ball enters the means, the maximum number of accommodated means is changed, and the changing means selectively sets which of the entrances allows the ball to pass therethrough. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the ball entering from the first entrance and the ball entering from the second entrance can be stored together in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required space as compared with a case where separate storage units are provided respectively.

  In the gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interference means capable of projecting into the accommodation means, wherein the interference means interferes with a ball which is projected and stored inside the accommodation means, and A game machine A8 characterized in that the maximum accommodation number of accommodation means is changed depending on whether or not the accommodation means is evacuated to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the number of balls to be accommodated is changed by changing the volume inside the accommodation means without changing the path of the ball entering the accommodation means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the accommodation number without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the accommodation means, and is configured to be able to arrange a ball on the front side during evacuation. Gaming machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of evacuation can be hidden by the ball arranged in front. This makes it possible to make the operation of the interference means inconspicuous while eliminating the need for an additional shielding member.

<Points to suppress unnecessary balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Delay means for delaying the flow of a ball at an upstream position of the entrance when the incoming ball switching means is in the second state, as compared with the case where the incoming ball switching means is in the first state; A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a detecting means is arranged such that a detection port of a special winning opening is oriented sideways, and an operation member for rolling the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a gaming machine which operates upon passage of a mouth and drops a ball on an operation member at the time of the operation, thereby preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through a detection port of a detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the ball that has fallen from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the out port, it is possible to strike the ball so that the ball does not fall from the operating member. There is a problem that a certain number of pitches actually occur depending on whether or not (the level of the technique of launching by the player).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the incoming ball switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing from the upstream position of the incoming port cannot be guided to the incoming port, the delay means operates. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to easily arrange the ball at an upstream position of the ball entrance until the ball switching device is switched to the first state. If the incoming ball switching means is in the first state while the ball is at a position upstream of the entrance, the ball is guided to the entrance. As a result, the effect of the player's launching technique on the actual pitch can be reduced, so that a beginner-friendly gaming machine can be configured.

  The mode of the delay unit is not limited. For example, it may be a drop restricting means composed of a horizontally long member for supporting the ball from below and restricting the ball from falling down to the end, or a projecting means formed of a projection for decelerating the ball by contact.

  In the gaming machine B1, the delay means increases the degree of delay in a state where the ball is arranged on the downstream side as compared with a case where the ball is arranged on the upstream side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases in a state where the ball is arranged downstream of the delay means, so that the attention of the ball flowing down along the delay means is increased. Can be improved.

  Note that the degree of the delay is not limited at all. For example, the velocity of the ball may be high or low, or the degree of backflow of the ball when the incoming ball switching means is switched from the second state to the first state may be high or low.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is configured such that a ball arranged on a downstream side has a shape in which an interval between the ball and the opening direction of the entrance is larger than a ball arranged on an upstream side. A gaming machine B3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means is arranged in the downstream side of the delay means in such a manner that the distance between the opening direction of the entrance opening and the ball increases. Is formed, it is possible to suppress direct entry into the entrance to the ball when the ball vigorously flows down the delay means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the incoming ball switching means includes an ascent means for elevating a game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means comprises: A gaming machine B4, which is disposed below the lifting means in a state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is disposed below the ascending means in the first state, so that the ball can be moved from the incoming ball switching means. The ball can be delayed after being visually recognized by the player as if it had fallen. As a result, attention to the ball can be improved.

  The gaming machine B5, further comprising a climbing restricting means which is disposed on the upstream side of the ball flow path from the lifting means and regulates the upward movement of the ball and guides the ball in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is restricted by the upward restricting means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

  The gaming machine B6, wherein the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascent control means is provided with a rescue entrance for giving a predetermined benefit to the player.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B5, as a benefit different from the benefit generated when the ball passes through the entrance opening due to the ball that has been given a load when the ascent means is lifted and flew off. In addition, it is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the rescue entrance. Thus, even if the ball deviates from the downflow path to the entrance, it is possible to prevent the attention from being reduced, and the movement of the ball can enhance the interest of the player.

  The gaming machine B7 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, wherein the delay means includes a variable action portion having a different effect on a ball depending on a mode of arrival at the delay means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be made different depending on the mode of arrival at the delay means. As a result, it is possible to select different spheres to give different effects.

  It should be noted that the difference between the modes of arrival is not limited. For example, a difference in the arrival position of the ball with reference to the entrance port or a difference in the flowing direction of the ball before reaching the delay means may be used.

  In the gaming machine B7, the variable action section delays the flow of the ball reaching the delay means at a position separated from the entrance by a predetermined distance or less, while separating from the entrance by a predetermined distance or more. The gaming machine B8, wherein the gaming machine B8 does not act on a ball that has reached the delay means at a position.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine B7, for a ball that is close to the entrance and cannot switch the state of the entrance switching means in time, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action section. On the other hand, an appropriate game speed can be maintained by not allowing the variable action portion to act on a ball that is far from the ball entrance and is sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball switching device.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game launch>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A ball that can pass through the entrance in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance during a period in which the first state was formed before the entrance switching means maintains the first state; A gaming machine C1 comprising number changing means capable of changing the number.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, by the number changing means, the number of balls passing through the entrance hole in the state where the incoming ball switching means forms the first state, and before that, the incoming ball switching means uses the In the case where the first state is formed, it can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance, so that in a series of operation patterns in which the incoming ball switching means repeatedly forms the first state, the profit given to the player can be reduced. Adjustments can be made.

  The method of adjusting the profit is not limited. For example, due to having passed through a large number of balls through the ball entrance when the ball switching device previously formed the first state, the ball was then entered when the ball switching device formed the first state. The mode in which the number of balls that can enter the mouth may be suppressed may be used, or when the incoming ball switching unit next forms the first state due to a similar event, the profit of the player (not limited to outgoing balls, For example, the right to shift to the high probability state may be obtained).

  In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means includes: accommodation means for accommodating the balls passing through the entrance; an exit through which the balls pass when the balls exit the accommodation means; Discharge switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, and the discharge switching means can be operated in a plurality of types of operation modes. A gaming machine C2 comprising: an operation mode switching unit that enables a change in the number of balls ejected from the storage unit depending on a difference in operation mode.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the number of the balls accommodated in the accommodating means discharged from the outlet can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the balls remain in the accommodating means. And the number of remaining spheres can be made variable. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres required until the accommodation means is filled with spheres, and to physically change the maximum number of spheres passing through the entrance.

  The difference between the operation modes is not limited at all. For example, the operation periods may be different, or when a plurality of outlets are arranged, the discharge switching unit provided in which outlet is operated (operating target) may be different.

  The gaming machine C3, wherein in the gaming machine C2, the number changing means includes an interval maintaining means for maintaining an interval of discharging balls from the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, since the interval of discharging the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, regardless of the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means, The number of discharge balls from the discharge port can be defined according to the length of the period in which the switching unit is in the first state. Therefore, the number of balls to be discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot symbol.

  The mode of the interval maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load that the ball immediately before the discharge port receives from the subsequent ball is perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or the flow path may be formed from the inner wall of the storage means. A rib that is protruded and applies a load to the sphere to decelerate the sphere may be used as the means.

  In the gaming machine C3, the gap maintaining means includes a protrusion protruding from an inner surface of the housing means in a flow path of the ball near the outlet.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, since the protruding portion is protruded into the downflow path, the downflowing ball is brought into contact with the protruding portion to decelerate, so that the ball having a short distance from the discharge port. And the falling speed of the sphere with a short distance from the discharge port can be prevented from changing greatly, and the falling speed of the sphere can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine C4, the accommodating means includes a discharge path for causing the ball to flow continuously in a predetermined flowing direction immediately before the discharge port, and the protruding portion is staggered from an opposing surface constituting the discharge path. A game machine C5, which is projected at predetermined intervals.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the protruding portions are alternately protruded from the opposing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the protruding portions collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path, thereby causing the balls to collide. It is possible to cause the ball to collide with the protrusion at predetermined intervals while being displaced in the vertical direction in the predetermined flow-down direction, and the action of decelerating the ball can be maintained for a long time.

  In the gaming machine C5, the accommodation means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and that rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. A gaming machine C6 characterized in that the falling velocity of the ball is formed to be higher than the falling velocity of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flow down at a higher speed than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so that the balls stored in the storage means. Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) for discharging the balls from the outlet can be kept constant.

  The gaming machine C7 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, wherein the entrance includes an opening for judging a special symbol big hit by passing a ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of times of the special symbol big hit determination and the number of entering balls into the entrance can be associated. Thereby, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed according to the number of times of determination of the special symbol required until the big hit is obtained.

  The gaming machine C7 includes starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting port can enter the accommodation means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine C8.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices provided can be reduced.

  Incidentally, the outlet includes a first outlet and a second outlet arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching means changes the state of the first outlet and the second outlet independently of each other. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are provided to the storage means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the ball is discharged from the second discharge port (under the same conditions). It may be arranged at a position where the number of remaining balls can be changed.

  In this case, the number of the balls remaining in the storage means can be changed depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port, so that the flow speed of the balls flowing down the storage means changes. Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the number of balls discharged from the storage means.

  The arrangement of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodation means and the other may be arranged at an intermediate position of the accommodation means, or both may be arranged at the lower end, and a branched flow path for distributing the sphere may be arranged upstream thereof. You may do it.

  Further, the operation mode of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited. For example, they may be opened one by one, or both may be opened. When both are opened, the time required to discharge the same number of balls from the storage means can be reduced as compared with the case where balls are discharged from a single discharge port. Thereby, the interval in the jackpot game can be shortened, and the number of balls ejected from the out mouth during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  By the way, the first discharge port may be disposed at a lower end of the storage means, and the second discharge port may be disposed upstream of the first discharge port.

  In this case, when discharging the ball from the second discharge port, regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state, the ball disposed between the first discharge port and the second discharge port is stored in the storage means. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls accommodated in the accommodation means varies, it is possible to easily keep the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls constant. Further, even if the launch of the ball is reduced due to clogging of the ball or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the ball remains inside the storage means.

  Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on a downstream side branched at a lower end portion of the storage means.

  In this case, from the state in which the same number of balls are accommodated in the accommodation means, it is possible to switch from which outlet the last ejected ball is ejected through the operation mode of the ejection switching means. From the behavior at the start, it can be difficult to grasp the discharge mode of the ball. That is, for example, in a case where the profit given to the player changes depending on which discharge port discharges the ball that is discharged last, it is possible to improve the attention to the flow-down state of the ball.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. Switching drive means for switching the incoming ball switching means to the second state in response to the predetermined number of balls passing through the entrance during the first state, and After the switching drive by the switching drive unit is started, an allowed state that allows the ball to pass to the entrance and a driven ball state switching unit that can form a regulated state that regulates the passage of the ball, A gaming machine D1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the after-drive ball-entry state switching means switches whether or not a ball can enter after the entrance has been closed by the switching drive means, an extra ball can enter. Timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls throughout the jackpot game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine D1, the entrance includes a first entrance and a second entrance, and the post-drive entry state switching means forms the restricted state at the first entrance. The gaming machine D2, wherein the second entrance is formed in the allowable state.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number depends on whether the ball passes through the first entrance and the ball passes through the second entrance. It is possible to switch whether or not the ball can be made to enter the ball, so that it is possible to improve the attention of which ball opening is opened by the ball switching device.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first entrance is provided with a drop hole in front of the opening, and when the entrance switching means starts switching to the second state, the first entrance is closer to the first entrance than in front of the opening. A gaming machine D3, wherein a ball disposed on the upstream side is also dropped into the drop hole.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D2, even when the ball remains upstream of the first ball entrance, the ball is dropped into the hole while the ball switching device maintains the second state. And keep it away from the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a ball exceeding the specified number from passing through the first entrance.

<Points where balls join the storage channel from multiple winning ports>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. A container for accommodating a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the entrance, wherein the entrance includes at least a first entrance and a second entrance, and the first entrance Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 wherein the accommodation means is formed in such a manner that the balls passing through the second entrance are merged.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance merge in the accommodation means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. The number of balls that can pass through the second entrance hole can be changed in relation to the number of balls that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts associated therewith) throughout the entire game can be made uniform.

  In the gaming machine E1, when the accommodation means is empty, the number of balls that can be accommodated in the accommodation means by passing through the first entrance and the accommodation by passing through the second entrance. A gaming machine E2, wherein the number of balls that can be accommodated in the means is different.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance and the number of balls that can enter the second entrance are different. The player's attention to whether or not the entrance to the ball is opened can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance is set smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second entrance, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls are discharged when each entrance is closed. The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance, and the first entrance is opened during the opening when the second entrance is opened a plurality of times. A gaming machine E3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, the ball that has passed through the second entrance before opening the first entrance and the second entrance after opening the first entrance. The passed ball can make a substantial difference to the player.

  That is, if the ball passes through the second entrance before opening the first entrance, even if more balls than the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, the ball is exceeded. No ball is ejected, and the number of balls obtained by subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated from the first entrance, so that the second entrance has the same number as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance. The player will only get the same profit as passing through the number of.

  On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, and if more balls than can be accommodated from the first entrance pass through the second entrance, they are deducted. The player can get additional benefits.

<Points where the interference member overhangs>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A game machine comprising: an incoming ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the incoming ball inlet; and a detecting means for detecting the incoming ball to the incoming ball inlet. An interfering means which is disposed in a flow path of a ball passing through the entrance and is switchable between a protruding state in which the ball can interfere and a retracted state in which the ball does not interfere. Gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening during a jackpot game is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered, and an entry of a specified number of balls. There is a gaming machine which is controlled so as to change the number of balls entering the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time when the ball is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is independent and depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There is a problem that a difference may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, since the interference means is disposed on the flow path of the ball passing through the entrance, the interference means is maintained in the extended state, so that the distance from the entrance to the interference means is maintained. Ball can be blocked in the path, and further balls can be prevented from passing through the entrance. Thereby, it is possible to adjust the prize ball throughout the jackpot game by the operation mode of the interference means.

  A gaming machine F2 comprising a stopping means for stopping a ball in front of the interference means in the retreat state of the interference means in the gaming machine F1.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the interference means can be changed to the overhang state in a state where the ball is parked in front of the interference means. , The movement can be hidden by the sphere. Therefore, the operation can be made hard to be noticed by the player.

  In the gaming machine F2, the stopping means is switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the state of the interference means can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of the state change state of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means, so while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state, The timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means can be changed in a plurality of types.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize is possible based on the attacker's actions>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. And a profit switching means that can be switched in the game machine. In the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, when a ball can pass through the profit provision means, It is possible to switch between the case where the ball cannot pass through the application means. Game machine G1, wherein.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, when the ball can pass through the profit provision means, and when the ball passes through the profit provision means. Since it is possible to switch between cases where it is not possible, it does not obstruct the entry of the ball into the entrance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the entrance.

  The gaming machine G1 includes a stopping means disposed upstream of the profit switching means and switched between a stopping state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which the ball passing through the detecting means is passed. The stopping means is switched from the stopped state to the passing state as the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, and the ball flowing downstream of the stopping means is switched to the profit switching. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, the ball passing through the entrance is once stopped by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball gains at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent reaching to the switching means. Thus, no matter how the ball passes through the entrance while the entry switching device is in the first state, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching device at unexpected timing. it can.

  The gaming machine G2 further includes a period changing unit that changes a period during which the ball that passes through the stopping unit and reaches the profit switching unit after switching the stopping unit to the passing state. Gaming machine G3.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period in which the ball can pass through the stopping means and reach the profit switching means changes due to the period changing means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the playability of the game, and to improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

  Incidentally, the period changing means may be means for changing the flowing speed of the ball passing through the stopping means, or means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state to when the ball starts to flow, Means for changing the number of balls stopped at the stopping means may be used.

  The gaming machine G4, wherein in the gaming machine G3, the period changing means is formed so as to be able to switch the number of balls stopped by the stopping means in accordance with a profit given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G3, the profit given to the player can be predicted based on the number of balls parked in the stopping means, so that attention is paid to the balls parked in the stopping means. Strength can be improved.

  The means for switching the number of balls parked in the parking means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be stopped by the stopping means can be changed by a combination of a period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and a period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state immediately thereafter.

  That is, for example, when the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened, and then immediately after that, the period during which the entrance switching means is set to the first state is extremely shortened, However, since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream of the stopping means is extremely small, even if a new ball does not enter from the entrance, a large number of balls are stopped at the stopping means.

  On the other hand, if the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state is sufficiently long, and then immediately after that, the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state is extremely short, of the balls that have been parked in the stopping means, In addition to the fact that most of the balls flow downstream of the stopping means and that no new balls enter the entrance, almost no balls remain in the stopping means.

  In this way, by changing the period in which the stopping means is in the passing state and immediately after that, shortening the period in which the entering ball switching means is in the first state, the ball is stopped in the stopping means regardless of the launch mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the entering ball switching means includes a plurality of types of closing maintaining periods that are maintained in the second state, and the setting unit selects and sets the closing maintaining periods, and a predetermined period from an end point of the closing maintaining periods. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a lapse.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, since the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods in which the entering ball switching means maintains the second state, the ball is stopped. Is formed from a plurality of types until the profit switching means is switched to the first state after passing through, even if the number of balls stopped by the stopping means is the same, It is possible to control to be able to form when passing and when not passing. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the power of attention for the downward flow of the ball.

  Note that, for example, a period in which the entrance ball switching unit is maintained in the first state for a period long enough to allow a specified number of balls to pass through the entrance, and immediately after that, a period in which the entrance ball switching unit is maintained in the second state. When the setting unit selects the closed maintenance period in an extremely short manner (the ball passing through the stopping unit is shorter than the ball reaching the profit switching unit), the entering ball switching unit enters the first state immediately thereafter. By changing the state of the profit switching means from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set a period from when the stopping means enters the passing state to when the profit switching means enters the first state. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed the stopping means passes through the profit provision means. Thereby, regardless of the number of balls arresting on the arresting means and the mode of the arrest (for example, timing), it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the sphere that has passed the arresting means passes through the profit provision means.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the entrance switching means is performed not by the first operation caused by a specified number of balls entering the entrance, but by a second operation caused by the passage of a specified time. A gaming machine G6 including an intentional selecting means for intentionally selecting the game machine G6.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, by the action of the intentional selecting means, the switching operation of the incoming ball switching means is limited to the operation at a preset time, It is possible to eliminate the randomness of switching depending on the passage manner of the ball at the entrance. Thereby, while the profit switching means is in the first state, it is possible to secure a long time during which the ball is not allowed to enter the ball.

  The intentional selecting means is exemplified by a state in which the ball does not pass through the entrance due to the passage of less than the specified number of balls. This can be realized by intentionally clogging (making the ball not passing) the ball in the middle of passing through the entrance.

<Point 2 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize is possible based on the attacker's operation, there is a fool>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. A gaming machine H1 comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched in the game machine, wherein the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by the operation mode of the incoming ball switching means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (See, for example, JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the special winning opening during the period in which the distributing unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided.In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball heading to the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching unit can be changed by the operation mode of the ball switching unit while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control in what manner the ball is reached by the profit switching means.

  The gaming machine H2, wherein the number of balls related to the time when the entering ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means in the gaming machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the player can determine how the ball is guided to the profit switching means based on the length of the incoming ball switching means maintained in the second state. , It is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the entering ball switching means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a start state in which a ball is started to be sent to the profit switching means is formed while the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Gaming machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means only after the start state, the operation of the ball entry switching means is stopped immediately before the start state, Since it is possible to return to the first state, it is possible to form a playability in which throwing the ball to the profit switching means is not necessarily started just by starting the operation from the first state. As a result, it is necessary to directly check whether the ball reaches the profit switching means, so that the attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Gaming machine Z1. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable a ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C8, D1 to D3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, G1 to G6, and H1 to H3, the gaming machine includes a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed the special winning opening is sorted by the sorting unit to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route, and the profit given to the player changes according to the sorting result. (For example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2014-155538).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the ball that has entered the special winning opening.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably improving the attention to a ball that has entered a special winning opening. And
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. Switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entrance and a second state in which a ball flowing from the upstream side of the entrance cannot be guided to the entrance, and the entrance Detecting means for detecting a ball entering the game, profit providing means for giving a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the ball passing through the entrance, and a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means And a profit switching means for switching the ball in the second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means, wherein the ball reaches the profit switching means by an operation mode of the incoming ball switching means. Is configured to be variable.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein the number of balls related to the time at which the incoming ball switching unit is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching unit. Is done.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the ball is thrown to the profit switching means while the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. Is formed, a start state is formed.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to satisfactorily improve the attention to the ball that has entered the special winning opening.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the number of balls guided to the profit switching means can be changed depending on the time for operating the entering ball switching means. it can.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the attention to the ball can be further improved.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 110 main controller (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selecting means)
640 Second entrance (part of entrance, starting port)
640a Electric accessory (part of entry switching means)
1000a First specific winning opening (part of the entrance, first entrance)
1140 Projection (part of interval maintaining means, projection)
1150 Discharge port (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means)
1231 Storage channel (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number changing means, part of ball entry state switching means after driving, storage means, discharge path)
1231a Guide surface (part of interval maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of interval maintaining means, rolling discharge plate part)
1235 Projecting part (part of interval maintaining means, projecting part)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Opening / closing plate (part of ball entry switching means)
1310 Plate part (lifting means)
1331 Ball entry prevention part (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 regulating member (part of ball entry preventing means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, stopping means)
2251 Second storage channel (part of ball entry prevention means, part of number change means, part of post-drive ball entry state switching means, storage means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a 2nd specific winning opening (part of the entrance, 2nd entrance)
2840 slide plate (part of ball entry switching means)
3181 additional winning opening (relief entrance)
3182 Curved extension plate (lift control means)
3250 Drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b Terminal surface (part of falling hole)
4830 Specific area (part of profit provision means)
4850 distribution device (profit switching means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit provision means)
5900 Ball adjustment device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means)
7260 Second drop delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)

Claims (3)

A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entry A ball switching unit configured to switch a ball flowing down from an upstream side of the mouth into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, a detection unit that detects a ball entering the ball entrance, and the ball entrance. A profit providing means for providing a predetermined benefit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit providing means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit providing means. And a profit switching means that can be switched by
A gaming machine, wherein a mode in which a ball reaches the profit switching means can be changed by an operation mode of the entering ball switching means.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a number of balls related to a time when the entering ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means.   3. The start state in which a ball is thrown to the profit switching means is formed while the entering ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state. 4. Gaming machine.

Images